DRG100-120 - Operator Manual - IDRG02 - 03GB PDF

Reachstackers 10-12 tonnes
Publ. no IDRG02.03GB
Operator's manual in original OPERATOR’S MANUAL
DRG 100-120
1 Foreword ................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 About the operator's manual.............................................................................................. 1
1.2 About the documentation kit .............................................................................................. 4
1.3 Inspection and maintenance .............................................................................................. 5
2 Safety ..................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 Safety and emergency equipment ..................................................................................... 8
2.2 CE-marking ........................................................................................................................ 9
2.3 ANSI/ITSDF marking ....................................................................................................... 10
2.4 Keep in mind ..................................................................................................................... 11
2.5 Fire................................................................................................................................... 18
3 Overview............................................................................................................................... 20
3.1 Description ....................................................................................................................... 20
3.2 Plates ............................................................................................................................... 25
4 Instruments and controls ...................................................................................................... 32
4.1 Warning and indicator lights............................................................................................. 36
4.2 Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the engine................................................ 38
4.3 Switches .......................................................................................................................... 40
4.4 Travel direction selector and parking brake ..................................................................... 54
4.5 Multi-function lever........................................................................................................... 56
4.6 Load handling .................................................................................................................. 57
4.7 Pedals .............................................................................................................................. 61
4.8 Steering wheel ................................................................................................................. 62
4.9 Driver's seat ..................................................................................................................... 66
4.10 Heating / Air conditioning ................................................................................................. 69
4.11 Control system ................................................................................................................. 71
4.12 Optional equipment.......................................................................................................... 92
5 Handling ............................................................................................................................... 96
5.1 Running-in ....................................................................................................................... 98
5.2 Daily inspection................................................................................................................ 99
5.3 Error codes .................................................................................................................... 100
5.4 Operating ....................................................................................................................... 177
5.5 Load handling ................................................................................................................ 196
5.6 Customer settings via display ........................................................................................ 209
6 Inspection and maintenance............................................................................................... 221
6.1 Daily inspection.............................................................................................................. 222
6.2 Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 225
6.3 Service ........................................................................................................................... 255
7 Transporting the machine ................................................................................................... 257
7.1 Towing............................................................................................................................ 258
7.2 Lifting and transporting the machine.............................................................................. 260
7.3 Service position.............................................................................................................. 263
7.4 Long-term storage.......................................................................................................... 264
8 Environment and standards................................................................................................ 267
9 Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 269
10 Terminology ........................................................................................................................ 278
11 Index.................................................................................................................................... 281
Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

IDRG02.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 100-120
1 Foreword 1
1 Foreword
1.1 About the operator's manual
General
Thank you for choosing Kalmar as your machine supplier. We hope
that we will meet your expectations.
This Operator's manual contains information that you must keep in

mind for safe handling and optimal use of your new Kalmar machine.
Operator's manual, purpose

The operator's manual describes how the machine should be operated
and maintained in a correct manner.
Cargotec will not accept any responsibility for machine modifications

without permission from Cargotec. Further, Cargotec will not accept
any responsibility if other lifting devices, tools or work methods are
used other than those described in this manual.
Storage
The operator's manual should always be kept in the machine.
About machine version

The information in this publication corresponds with the machine's
design and appearance on delivery from Cargotec. Deviations may
arise due to customer adaptations.
Cargotec reserves the right to make changes to specifications and

equipment without prior notice. Information provided in the manual
applies at the date of issue.
Copyright
Cargotec Sweden AB
Duplication of the content in this manual, in whole or in part, is strictly

prohibited without written permission from Cargotec Sweden AB.
All duplication by any means, such as copying, printing, etc., is

prohibited.
Manufacturer
Cargotec Sweden AB, Movägen 1, SE-341 32 Ljungby, Sweden.

2 1 Foreword – Reading instructions
1.1.1 Reading instructions

Warning information
This manual contains descriptions of warnings that apply to your safety.
Warnings provide information about potential dangers that, if the
warnings are not followed, could result in injury or product damage.
DANGER
Situation that could lead to severe personal injury or
death if regulation is not followed.
WARNING
Situation that could lead to personal injury if regulation
is not followed.
CAUTION
Situation that could lead to product damage if
regulation is not followed.
Important information
Important information is denoted with NOTE and is intended to
facilitate the work process, handling or to increase understanding of
the information.
NOTE
Important information not related to safety.
Read the operator's manual

The symbol to the left is used in certain cases on the machine and
refers to important information in the Operator's manual.
000262
Read the operator's manual
Read the Maintenance manual

The symbol to the left is used in certain cases on the machine and
001128
refers to important information in the Maintenance manual.
Read the Maintenance manual

1 Foreword – Reading instructions 3
Optional equipment
There is a range of optional equipment available for the machine.
000264
Each description of optional equipment in the manual is marked with
a symbol, and contains an explanatory text. The symbol is positioned
Indicates optional equipment visibly by the text and image in question.
See the machine card for complete specifications of the machine's

product alternatives and optional equipment.

4 1 Foreword – About the documentation kit
1.2 About the documentation kit

Documentation kit
The following documentation is supplied for the machine:
• Operator's manual (in cab with machine).
• Maintenance manual.
• Spare parts catalogue with machine card.
There is supplementary documentation that can be ordered for the

machine:
• Workshop manual.
• Supplier documentation for engine, transmission, and drive axle.
Ordering documentation
The documentation is ordered from the dealer for Cargotec.
Always indicate publication number when ordering. The publication

number is printed down to the left on the cover and at the bottom of
all pages in the manual.

1 Foreword – Inspection and maintenance 5
1.3 Inspection and maintenance

General
Maintenance must be managed properly in order for the machine to
operate satisfactorily and at the lowest cost. Intervals for inspection
and maintenance refer to operation under normal environmental and
working conditions.
Maintenance described in this operator's manual can be performed by

the operator, see Chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance. It describes
the daily inspections that comprise ongoing checks and actions that the
operator should carry out when starting a shift.
Maintenance
For other maintenance not included in this operator's manual (service
and repairs), contact an authorised workshop.

6 2 Safety
2 Safety
General
Safety rules are intended to reduce the risk of personal injuries as well
as damage to the load or other property.
Only personnel trained for this machine may handle, operate, perform
service or be in its vicinity during its use.
The safety information in this operator's manual is intended for your

information and safety. It cannot, and is not intended to, cover all
possible events during operation. Responsible operators with the
right training is the only way to ensure the safe and prolonged use
of the machine.
The machine was thoroughly tested and adjusted before it left the
factory. This does not preclude the possibility that it has been damaged
during delivery. The machine must undergo a thorough inspection in
order to ensure correct function before being put into service.
Important to read the operator's manual

Incorrect operation may lead to injury and product, and/or property
damage. For this reason, please read this operator's manual very
carefully before using the machine. The operator's manual contains
important information about your Kalmar machine, the machine's
handling, safety during work and about the machine's daily inspection.
000262
In addition, you will obtain a lot of valuable information that makes

it easier for you at work.
The operator's manual should always remain in the machine. If it is lost

a replacement must be acquired immediately.
NOTE
Never use a machine that does not have an operator's manual.
Ask your foreman or supervisor if there is anything in the text you do

not understand or if you feel information is missing in any area.

2 Safety – Safety 7
Intended use
• The machine must only be used for what it is designed and
manufactured for, i.e. to lift and transport goods whose weight
and load centre/centre of gravity do not exceed the machine's
maximum permitted load capacity. If it is used in any other way
or in potentially dangerous environments (e.g. an explosive
environment, an area with asbestos dust) then special safety rules
must be followed and the machine must be equipped for such
operations.
• The machine should not be modified or changed without permission
from Cargotec. In the event of modifications approved by Cargotec
the signs on the machine and documentation affected must be
adapted to apply to the modification.
In the event of modification or conversion without Cargotec's
permission Cargotec's product liability ceases to apply. Modification
and conversion may only be made if the knowledge exists to
verify and test the modifications and conversions. Modifications
and conversions must be documented (date and action) and the
organisation responsible must be stated with name and address.
Signs and stickers must be updated in accordance with the
machine's new design.
• The machine may not be operated on public roads unless it has
been adapted according to national road safety regulations.
• It is always the machine owner's responsibility to ensure that the
machine has approved fire-fighting equipment in accordance with
the regulations in force.
• The machine is designed for use in outdoor temperatures -30 °C
to 40 °C, relative humidity 10 to 90%, and max. wind speeds
12.2 m/s. In the event of deviations from this, contact Cargotec.
Operator requirements
• The machine may only be operated by specially trained operators
who have the work supervisor's permission to operate the machine.
• Laws and regulations regarding driver's licenses, operator ID, etc.
must always be followed.
• The operator must be aware of and follow all local safety rules.
• The operator must follow the manufacturer's instructions.
• The operator should read and understand the machine's warning
and information plates as well as understand and be able to use
the machine's safety and warning equipment.
Prohibited operation
Machine operation is prohibited:
• If safety and warning equipment such as rear view mirrors,
headlights, etc., do not function correctly.
• In case of defective brakes, steering or lifting equipment.
• If there are unauthorised persons or vehicles within the machine's
work area.
• If the machine has been repaired, modified or adjusted without the
supervisor's/work management's permission.
• If the machine is equipped with tyres not approved by Cargotec.
• Overload system for load handling is not working.

8 2 Safety – Safety and emergency equipment
2.1 Safety and emergency equipment

General
A good working environment has safety and emergency equipment to
make the operator's work easier and safer.
The machine may be equipped with the following safety equipment:
1. Revolving beacon. Seat belt, passenger seat .

2. Revolving beacon . 13. Switch in driver's seat.
3. Buzzer automatic spreading 20' – 40' . Locks the transmission in neutral position and blocks
4. Back-up camera with distance warning . the load handling functions if the operator leaves the
operator's station. In addition, a warning is activated if the
5. Buzzer in cab to indicate alarm, overload or forgotten operator leaves the operator's station without applying
action, for example, leaving cab without applying the the parking brake.
parking brake.
14. Fire extinguisher .
6. Tyre pressure monitoring system that alerts when
incorrect tyre pressure is detected . A fire extinguisher may also be located externally.
7. Horn. If the machine is equipped with fire extinguisher then it
must be approved in accordance with European standard
8. Electrically powered loud air horn . EN3. The fire extinguisher must be selected so that
9. External rear view mirrors. it is designed for use against fires in: fibrous fuels
(Class A), liquid fuels (Class B), gaseous fuels (Class
Used to provide improved visibility while manoeuvring and C) and electrical appliances. Adapted fire extinguishing
load handling. A rear view mirror on each side. equipment can be ordered from Cargotec.
10. Emergency exit from cab, right-hand door. Fire extinguishing system . (Not identified in the figure)
11. Control breaker for hydraulics. Can be activated automatically, manually on the display in
Cuts off all power supply and control signals to hydraulics. the cab or with a switch on the chassis.
12. Seat belt, 2-point. 15. Reverse alarm.
Seat belt, 3-point . 16. Back-up light.

2 Safety – CE-marking 9
2.2 CE-marking
CE-marking
(Declaration of Conformity, only applies to machines marketed
within EU/EEA.)
This machine is CE marked. This means that upon delivery it fulfils the
applicable "Essential Health and Safety Requirements" specified in
the EU Machine Directive, 2006/42/EC, as well as other EU directives
relevant to this machine type.
As proof that the requirements are fulfilled, the machine is provided

with an EC Declaration of Conformity, issued by Cargotec for every
machine. The EC declaration also includes tools and options produced
by the Cargotec. The documentation is a valuable document that
must be properly preserved and saved for at least 10 years. The
022104 documentation must always follow with the machine when it is sold.
Machine plates for CE marking, machine and See example of EC Declaration after 11 Index.
attachment
Anyone making modifications that affect the safety of the machine
also assumes responsibility for them. If the machine is used for other
purposes or with other tools than what is specified in these instructions,
safety must be ensured in each individual case. The machine owner
is responsible that the machine is used in accordance with the
instructions in the operator's manual. In some cases the application
area may require a new CE marking and issue of new EC declaration
of conformity.
For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

and standards.

10 2 Safety – ANSI/ITSDF marking
2.3 ANSI/ITSDF marking

ANSI/ITSDF marking
(Only applies to machines for the North American market.)
This machine is ANSI/ITSDF marked. This means that upon delivery it

fulfils the basic safety requirements of ANSI/ITSDF B56.1.
Anyone making modifications that affect the safety of the machine also
assumes responsibility for them.
If the machine is used for other purposes or with other tools than what
is specified in these instructions, safety must be ensured in each
individual case. The machine owner is responsible that the machine is
used in accordance with the instructions in the operator's manual.
For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

and standards.
Machine plates for ANSI/ITSDF marking, machine
and attachment

2 Safety – Keep in mind 11
2.4 Keep in mind

Interrupted operation and/or parking
CAUTION
Always turn off the electric power when the machine is
left, e.g. when parking or at the end of the shift.
Risk of fire!
Turn off the electric power with the battery
disconnector.
For machines with SCR-system (emission control with AdBlue):
NOTE
Wait for two minutes before the system voltage is disconnected
with the battery disconnector so that the SCR system has time to
be drained of AdBlue, this is particularly important in cold weather.
NOTE
Never leave the operator's station without first applying the parking
brake (ON position).
NOTE
Always remove the start key if the machine is to be left unattended.
During work shifts
DANGER
The attachment is a tool that handles heavy loads.
Extreme hazard to personal health and risk of property
damage!
Never walk under hanging loads. Make sure that no
persons stand or walk under a raised work attachment,
regardless of whether it is loaded or not.
DANGER
External equipment may only be used if it is approved
by Cargotec.
damage!
Only use equipment that is approved by Cargotec.

12 2 Safety – Keep in mind
DANGER
The parking brake should never be applied when the
machine is moving, unless an emergency requires it.
Very heavy braking. Risk of machine tipping, load
tipping over, being dropped or damage to property
or extreme danger!
Stop the machine before applying the parking brake.
DANGER
The machine's work area is large and visibility from
the operator's cab is restricted.
damage!
Keep in mind:
• Always check that no persons are in the way of the
machine or its equipment. Also check that the area
upwards is free. If there are unauthorised persons
or vehicles within the work area then the machine
must be stopped.
• The operator must always face in the travel
direction and should operate with special care
where persons or vehicles may appear.
• The operator must adapt the speed to the load and
ground conditions, visibility, and wind conditions,
etc.
• The operator must pay extra attention and operate
with special care near electric power lines,
viaducts, docksides, ramps, doorways, etc.
• Always operate carefully so that the attachment
does not collide with posts, power lines, etc.
• Use available visibility-enhancing equipment such
as rear view mirrors and camera ( ).

WARNING
Transporting loads is associated with major risks.
Risk of roll-over and tipping over! Chance of load
damage to property! Extreme danger!
Respect the lifting capacity of the machine and
exercise the greatest caution during load handling:
• The machine must only be operated on even
surfaces, intended for the machine's total weight
and ground pressure.
• All transporting of loads must take place in
transport position. Exercise caution when
operating, think about the width and height so
that the boom or attachment does not collide with
poles, cables, etc.
• Do not transport the load in a higher position than
necessary since this may cause the machine to roll
or tip over.
• Always operate with the load facing uphill on an
uphill or downhill grade, never operate or turn
across a grade.
• Operate the machine in reverse if the transported
load obscures visibility to the front.
• No personnel may encroach or stand under a
raised load.
• The operator must avoid forceful acceleration
and heavy braking to prevent risk of tipping and
roll-over.
• The operator must always adjust the speed when
turning to prevent skidding and risk of roll-over or
tipping over.
In the event of tipping or roll-over, hold onto the
steering wheel and remain in the cab. Do NOT
attempt to jump out of the cab until any movement
of the machine has finished.
When handling special loads local regulations may
apply. Learn about them and follow them.
WARNING
The machine's load capacity is limited!
Risk of roll-over and tipping over!
It is forbidden to exceed the machine's load capacity.
See the rating plate and load diagrams. The machine's
stability limit can be exceeded if the overloading
system is not working.

WARNING
The strength of the roof window may be significantly
reduced in case of exposure to substances containing
aromatic hydrocarbons, ketones, esters, or chlorinated
hydrocarbons.
Low strength! Danger!
Check the surface layer of the roof window and
clean only with washer fluid or mild detergent. Rinse
thoroughly with lukewarm water afterwards. Replace a
damaged roof window that shows cracks or scratches
immediately!
WARNING
Lifting loads in very windy conditions is associated
with great difficulties.
Avoid lifting loads at wind speeds higher than 12.2 m/s.
WARNING
The machine emits exhausts during operation.
Health hazards and fatal danger in poorly ventilated
facilities!
If possible, avoid operating the machine indoors
in poorly ventilated premises. Use exhaust venting
equipment!
WARNING
Work position on the machine is located up high.
Risk of falling and bodily injury!
Always use steps and handles when you go up or
down from the machine. Always turn to face the
machine. Do not jump!
WARNING
Cab doors must always be closed when operating.
Risk of personal injury and crushing in the event of
roll-over and tipping!
Always close the doors during the work shift.

WARNING
Passengers may only be carried in the cab provided
that there is a seat available for passengers. Do not
carry passengers on the machine outside the cab or
on the load.
Risk of personal injury!
A passenger in the cab must use a permanently
mounted extra passenger seat and seatbelt.
WARNING
The machine's hydraulic system includes accumulators
with high pressure.
Always exercise extreme caution when working
with the hydraulic system and avoid unnecessarily
remaining close to hydraulic components or hoses.
The accumulators must be drained prior to work in the
hydraulic system (see Maintenance manual).
WARNING
Handle batteries and connectors with great care during
charging and boosting (jump starting). Do not mix
up the battery terminals! Follow the instructions for
starting with a booster battery!
Danger of short circuit! Warning - risk of hydrogen gas
forming! Danger of sparks and fire! Hydrogen gas is
very explosive!
Batteries must always be equipped with covers over
terminals and connections. Connect positive terminals
first. Then connect the negative terminals in order to
avoid sparks that could ignite the hydrogen gas.
CAUTION
The machine uses oils and lubricants.
Health hazard in the event of protracted skin contact!
Avoid skin contact with oils and lubricants. Use
protective gloves.

CAUTION
AdBlue can irritate with skin and eye contact and if
inhaled.
Health hazard!
Handle carefully and avoid skin contact, wear
protective gloves. In the event of any contact with
the skin and spillage on clothing, wash the skin with
large quantities of water and change contaminated
clothing and gloves. In the event of eye contact, rinse
thoroughly with water for several minutes and seek
medical advice if necessary. If inhaled, breathe fresh
air and seek medical advice if necessary.
WARNING
Fire extinguishers contain dry chemicals.
Risk of breathing difficulties when using in an enclosed
space!
Use the fire extinguisher from the outside and into the
area to be extinguished. After use, ventilate the space
thoroughly.
CAUTION
Cracks or scratches result in reduced strength of the
roof window.
Low strength!
Replace a damaged roof window immediately.
CAUTION
The parking brake can be used as an EMERGENCY
BRAKE.
Brake shoe linings wear out and lose their braking
performance! Risk of unwanted movement by the
parked machine!
After emergency braking with the parking brake the
brake shoe linings must be checked as soon as
possible and replaced if necessary. Braking action of
the parking brake may be lost as the brake shoe linings
may have been worn down.
If the parking brake has been released mechanically
then it must always be reset to restore the machine's
parking brake function.

WARNING
Optional equipment such as two-way radio, remote
control door opener, etc. may emit non-ionising
radiation. Such equipment transmits within the
frequency band 100 - 500 MHz.
Danger of interference to active medical devices (e.g.
pacemakers).
Do not use two-way radios, remote control door
opener, etc. when someone with an implanted active
medical device is in the cab.
NOTE
Cargotec will not assume any responsibility for installed optional
equipment, which is not installed by Cargotec or an installer
approved by Cargotec.

18 2 Safety – Fire
2.5 Fire
Action in the event of fire
DANGER
In the event of fire the operator's safety must not be
compromised.
If given the opportunity, take the following action at
the slightest sign of fire:
1. Stop the machine and turn the ignition key to stop
position.
2. Leave the cab.
3. Switch off the system voltage with the battery
disconnector.
4. Alert the rescue services.
5. Try to extinguish the fire.
If this is not possible, leave the machine and the
risk area.
DANGER
Smoke can be extremely toxic.
Smoke subdues, suffocates and can kill people!
Smoke can cause damage to lungs and respiratory
organs even in small quantities.
Avoid breathing fumes, do not stand in the smoke.
Use breathing apparatus for fire fighting and work
with burnt material.

2 Safety – Fire 19
Fire prevention measures
DANGER
Residue from fuel, oils, grease or other flammable
materials on the engine or in the engine compartment
is a fire hazard.
Fire hazard!
Remove residue of flammable materials in the engine
compartment as soon as they are detected. Be extra
careful on hot surfaces such as exhaust systems,
manifolds or turbochargers. If leakage of oil, fuel or
coolant is detected, the reason should be investigated
and the fault corrected before starting the engine.
Make it a habit to make a visual inspection of the engine and engine

compartment during the daily inspection. This helps to quickly detect
if anything abnormal has happened or is about to happen. Look
particularly closely for oil, fuel, AdBlue or coolant leakage, loose bolts,
worn or poorly tensioned drive belts, loose connections, damaged
hoses and electrical cables. The inspection only takes a few minutes
and can prevent serious faults and costly repairs.
CAUTION
High-pressure washing of sensitive components may
lead to short-circuiting and cause malfunction.
Product damage!
Do not use a high-pressure washer on the cab, radiator,
battery compartment, electric components, control
units, connectors, cable joints, cylinder seals, stub
axles, axle seals and chains.
Action after fire

When handling a machine damaged by fire, or exposed to excessive
heat, the following safety regulations must always be followed:
• Check that the fire has been fully extinguished. Re-extinguish if
necessary.
• Make sure that system voltage is switched off with the battery
disconnector.
• Make sure that the machine is in a secure location, service position.
• Check for that there are no leaks which could cause damage to
the surrounding environment.
• Never touch the burned components with bare hands in order to
avoid coming into contact with molten polymer material.
• Use breathing apparatus, thick gloves and protective safety
goggles.
• Contact Cargotec.

20 3 Overview
3 Overview
3.1 Description
General
The DRG 100 machine is a reachstacker for handling containers. It has
a maximum lifting capacity of 10 tonnes and a lifting height of 6 or 8
containers (8' 6" container).
3.1.1 Identification of the machine

Type designation of reachstacker
Each machine from Cargotec has a type designation. Example: Type
designation DRG 100-54S6 indicates the following:
• D - Diesel engine
• R - Reachstacker
• G – Generation
• 100 - Lift capacity, 1st row, decitonne
• 54 – Axle distance, decimetre
• S – Spreading, adjustable top lift
• 6 - Max. no. of containers when stacking
Machine card
Cargotec machines are adaptable in different ways with product
alternatives and optional equipment. This is in order to satisfy as broad
a customer base as possible.
A machine card is supplied together with the spare parts catalogue.

The machine card contains complete specifications of the machine's
product alternatives and optional equipment.
The machine card must be updated when the machine is modified

and Cargotec must be informed.

3 Overview – Overview description 21
3.1.2 Overview description

General
This section provides a short presentation of the machine's parts, which
are pointed out in the overview figure below.
1. Steering axle 5. Attachment

2. Engine 6. Boom
3. Transmission 7. Cab
4. Drive axle
Engine
The engine is a straight 6-cylinder turbocharged low emission engine
with intercooler. The engine provides the power for propulsion and
hydraulics.
The machine is equipped with one of the following engine options:

• Volvo TAD871VE Stage 4/Tier 4f.
• Volvo TAD851VE Stage 3A/Tier 3A.
Transmission
The transmission is fully automatic with torque converter. It has 3
forward gears and 3 reverse gears. The hydraulic pumps for working
hydraulics are mounted on the transmission.
The machine is equipped with Dana Spicer Off-Highway TE17000FF.
Drive axle
The drive axle (front axle) is equipped with a differential and hub
reductions of the planetary gear type.
Brakes
The machine has a brake circuit and is equipped with hydraulically
operated brakes. The brake units consist of fully enclosed oil-cooled
disc brakes with external cooling.
The parking brake is electro-hydraulically operated and brakes with a

disc brake. The disc brake acts on the drive axle's input shaft. The
parking brake is applied by spring force and released by hydraulic
pressure. Parking brake application is automatic if the ignition key
lock is switched off.

22 3 Overview – Overview description
Steering
The machine is steered with the rear axle. A double-acting hydraulic
cylinder acts on the wheel pair. The steering is linear, that is, the
steering angle is dependent on the number of steering wheel turns.
Load handling
The boom and attachment are used for load handling. The boom is
operated vertically (angle) and longitudinally (length).
The boom is available in two versions depending on the stacking

capacity.
• Two-part boom (duplex) max. 6 containers.
• Three-part boom (triplex) max. 8 containers .
The attachment is a top lift attachment. The attachment holds the load
secure. Securing the load and operating the attachment takes place
electro-hydraulically.
Electrical system
The electrical system consists of electrical and electromagnetic
components such as battery, switches, cable harnesses, solenoid
valves, fuses and relays.
Control system
The machine has a computer-based control and monitoring system for
monitoring and controlling the machine's functions as well as handling
all functions in the machine, such as power electronics, drivetrain and
hydraulic system. The control system facilitates maintenance and
troubleshooting.
Cab
The cab is available in one version. Controls, instrumentation and
equipment are based on common modules whose functions are
customisable.
The cab consists of a supporting frame to withstand falling objects in

accordance with applicable standards. It is equipped with filtered inlet,
recirculation as well as heating or air conditioning.
The roof window is made of high-strength material and withstands

heavy blows, e.g. from falling objects.
The cab is manually movable longitudinally and is hydraulically tiltable

( ).
Hydraulic system
The hydraulic system is divided in two parts, working hydraulics and
brake system.
The working hydraulics include hydraulics for steering, load handling

and cab functions. The working hydraulics are supplied from three
variable load-sensing axial piston pumps and a fixed gear pump for
cleaning and cooling of the hydraulic oil. The hydraulic oil is cleaned
with a low-pressure filter in the hydraulic tank and/or high pressure filter
( ) after the hydraulic pumps.
The brake system is separated from the working hydraulics with its own
tank, fixed gear-pump, high-pressure filter, accumulators and cooler.

3 Overview – Overview description 23
Other equipment
Standard equipment
1. Interior lighting 11. Bottle holder in left-hand door side.

2. Wiper, roof Mesh pocket in right-hand door side; storage
compartment.
3. Interior rear view mirror
12. Storage compartment in right-hand arm rest
4. Wiper, windscreen
13. Cover lid
5. Steering wheel console with three individually
adjustable shafts with electrically adjustable height 14. Work lights attachment, 2 lights
position
15. Work lights boom, 2 lights
6. Storage compartment in front panel.
16. Work lights cab roof, 2 lights
Cup holder for storage compartment in the front
17. Revolving beacon
panel. The cup holder can be mounted in any storage
compartment. 18. Reverse alarm (right-hand side)
7. Storage compartment for paper in the seat console 19. Opening window right and left-hand door
The operator's manual is stored in the rear compartment 20. Tinted laminated windscreen
on the seat.
21. Steps and hand rail for entry to the cab with non-slip
8. Work console with four individually adjustable shafts plate on the steps and lower edge of the door sill
with electrically adjustable height and length position
22. External rear view mirrors
9. Refrigerated storage compartment right-hand side front
23. Horn
panel
10. Door handle for cab instep

24 3 Overview – Overview description
Optional equipment
1. Audio system 17. Extra work lights front wing, 2 or 4 lights

2. Sun visor, rear window 18. Rear view mirrors fitted on the wings
3. Sun visor, roof window 19. Extra work lights boom, 2 lights
4. Location for two-way radio 20. Mud flaps, front and rear
5. Seat for passenger with 2-point seat belt, to the left 21. Raised air intake with pre-cleaner
of the driver's seat
22. Central lubrication machine and attachment
6. Combined wiper, windscreen and roof
23. Lockable tank cap
7. Sun visor, front windscreen
24. Auxiliary heater (electrical connection)
8. Display for fire extinguishing system
Equipment kit 1: engine and cab heater
9. Writing table with light
Equipment kit 2: start interlock, engine and cab heater,
10. Socket 12/24 VDC or 5V USB 4 pcs tank warmer hydraulics and brake system
11. Extra cup holder for the storage compartment in the 25. Fire extinguisher
front panel
26. Electrically operated rear view mirrors
12. Back-up camera with monitor
Electrically-heated rear view mirrors
Distance warning function for back-up camera
27. Electrically powered loud air horn
13. Storage compartment behind the driver's seat console
28. Extra work lights attachment, 2 lights
29. Short-stop heater (Not positioned in figure).
14. Air-suspension driver's seat with 3-point seat belt and
electrical heating 30. Tool kit (Not positioned in figure)
Head rest 31. Non-slip plate on tank and wings (Not positioned
in figure)
Arm rest left-hand side
15. Alcolock
16. Revolving beacon

3 Overview – Plates 25
3.2 Plates
Product plates Europe
The following shows what product plates should be fitted on the
machine when operating in Europe. When ordering spare parts and in
case of enquiries always state model designation and serial number
in accordance with the plates. The plates' part numbers are stated
on each respective plate.
1. Machine plate (example), A68645.XXXX

T = Machine type
M = Machine model
S/N = Serial number/Year of manufacture
Q = Machine's classed lift capacity acc. ISO3691-2
P = Engine power
W = Machine's operating weight (without load)
L = Distance between leading edge of wheels and load's centre of
gravity
H = Classed lifting height
022104
Field H and L indicate how big a load the machine can handle at a
specified attachment height (H) and distance from the machine's
leading edge (L).
Machine plate can only be ordered with complete engraving.
2. Type plate for attachment (example)
Weight = Attachment weight.
Type = Attachment type
Serial No. = Serial number.
Manufacturing Year = Year of manufacture.
Type plate can only be ordered with complete engraving.

26 3 Overview – Plates
Warning and information plates

The following figures show the warning texts and information texts
that are located on the machine. The operator must be aware of the
warnings and should also follow the instructions and information given
on the plates.
Make sure warning and information symbols on the machine and its
components are always easy to see and are legible. Plates that have
been damaged, illegible or painted over must be replaced immediately.
Frame, cab
Frame, cab
1. Lift point, 423049.0100
Attaching point for lifting device when lifting the machine and boom.
For lifting the machine (1a):
• front part of frame
000276
• rear part of frame by boom mounting

For lifting boom (1b):
• front part of boom
• rear part of boom
2. Transport lock A38769.0100.
Fastening point for machine transport lock.
016612
3. Warning! A26939.0200
Warning! Read the operator's manual for information.
000278
Emergency lowering, see section 6.2.10 Hydraulic system for

information.
Boom removal and installation, see section 7.2.2 Transporting the
machine for information.

4. Functions, control lever, A61054.xxxx
5. Warning! A30536.0300
No passengers allowed. Passengers may only travel in the cab
provided that it is equipped with a permanently mounted passenger
seat.
000280
6. Warning! A30770.0200
Air conditioning. Located on the inside of left-hand frame member.
Filling of refrigerant requires special competence and authorisation
(follow national legislation and local rules).
000282
7. Warning! A54527.0200
Air conditioning. Filling of refrigerant requires special competence
and authorisation (follow national legislation and local rules).
1 = Refrigerant, type
2 = Amount, kg
3 = Pressure, bar
1
2
014528
8. Warning! A30531.0200
Risk of crushing.
9. Plate for non-ionising radiation, A57336.0100 .

Must be fitted on machines equipped with two-way radio or other
form of customised optional equipment in the cab that may emit
non-ionising radiation. The sign can be ordered from Cargotec if
necessary.
012968

Safety
Safety
10. Warning! A32442.0100
Do not jump. Always stay in the machine when there is a risk of
roll-over and hold on to the steering wheel.
000284
Electrical system
Electrical system
11. Plate battery voltage, A30534.0200
Switch off the battery voltage (with battery disconnector) when
removing/installing boom. Otherwise sparks and short-circuiting
may occur.
001979
A30534.0200
Engine
Engine
12. Filling point, fuel, 450202.0100
D
000286
450202.0100
13. Filling point, AdBlue (filler cap)
14. Warning! A30530.0100

Rotating fan.
000287
15. Warning! A30532.0100

Hot surfaces.
000288

16. Warning! Filling point, coolant, A57775.0100

Use only ready-mixed recommended coolant.
013692
17. Filling point, engine oil, A32439.0600
Power transmission, wheels
Power transmission, wheels

18. Filling point, transmission oil, A32439.0700
19. Inflation pressure, factory-fitted tyres

A32049.0100 1.0 MPa
000290
NOTE
Read chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance regarding safety when
handling wheels.
If factory-fitted tyres are replaced with another tyre brand then only
the equivalent tyre size must be fitted, designed for the same air
pressure and approved for use on the product.
20. Warning! A57480.0300

Risk of explosion when working with tyres and rims, see section
6.2.11 Tyres and rims for information.
Brake system
Brake system
21. Filling point, oil for brake system, 450203.0100
000292

Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system
22. Filling point hydraulic oil, 450203.0100
000292
23. Pressure hydraulics, A54518 (example below)
Indication of the machine's set pressures. The figures are
engraved.
24. Warning! A30529.0100

Pressure. Always release the pressure from the accumulators
before working on the hydraulic system.
Work with the hydraulic system shall always be performed by
authorised personnel!
000294
Attachment
Attachment
25. Warning! A30533.0200
Rotating parts.
000853

26. Warning! A32440.0100

Do not walk or stand under a suspended load.
000296

32 4 Instruments and controls
4 Instruments and controls

General
Do not operate the machine before you know the position and function
of instruments and controls, and completely understand how they are
used!
This chapter gives general information about instruments, switches,

controls and other equipment in the machine's cab.
NOTE
Thoroughly read the following chapter about instruments and
controls.
Cab overview
1. Travel direction selector and parking brake 8. Right-hand dashboard panel, rear section
2. Multi-function lever 9. Arm rest and storage box
3. Steering wheel 10. Driver's seat
4. Steering wheel panel 11. Accelerator
5. Display with function keys 12. Brake pedals
6. Right-hand dashboard panel, front section 13. Joystick or mini steering wheel
7. Right-hand dashboard panel, centre section
Rear cab section, see Rear cab section, page 35.
Roof panel cab, see Roof panel, page 35.

4 Instruments and controls – Instruments and controls 33
Steering wheel panel
Steering wheel panel

14. Ignition key lock
14
21 22 23 30 16 17 15. Engine start and stop button
16. Indicator light, parking brake
17. Indicator light, high beams
18
18. Indicator light for active errors
24 19
19. Indicator light for direction indicators
25 20 20. Warning lamp, by-pass of safety system
21. Switch for windscreen wiper, windscreen, continuous
26
Switch for combined windscreen wiper, windscreen/roof window,
continuous
012692
27 28 29 32 31 33 15 22. Switch for windscreen wiper, windscreen, intermittent wiping
Steering wheel panel Switch for combined windscreen wiper, windscreen/roof window,
intermittent wiping
23. Switch for windscreen flusher
24. Switch for windscreen wiper, roof, intermittent wiping
25. Switch, windscreen wiper roof, continuous
26. Switch, windscreen wiper rear, continuous
27. Switch for windscreen wiper, rear, intermittent wiping
28. Light sensor
29. No function
30. Switch for manual shifting up
31. Switch for manual shifting down
32. Switch for automatic shifting
33. Travel direction indicator, Forward Neutral Reverse
Right-hand dashboard panel, front section
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 34. Control breaker for hydraulics

43
35. Switch for pause heater
36. Recirculation switch
37. Switch for defroster
38. Switch for reduced fan speed
41 42 44 45 46 39. Switch for automatic regulation of air conditioning

40. Switch for increased fan speed
41. Switch for increased temperature
42. Switch for reduced temperature
012693
43. Switch for cooling

47 48 49 50 51 52 44. Switch for air distribution, to the floor
45. Switch for air distribution, to the operator
46. Switch for air distribution, to the roof
47. Switch for by-pass of safety system
48. Switch for heated rear view mirror
Switch for heated rear windscreen
49. Control lever for electrically-operated mirrors
50. Switch for automatic cab tilt
51. Spare
52. Switch for audio system mute

34 4 Instruments and controls – Instruments and controls
Right-hand control panel, centre section
Right-hand control panel, centre section

53. Control lever
a Travel direction selector, Forward - Neutral - Reverse
b Control for lifting/ lowering
c Control for tilt
d Control for side shift
e Control for spreading
f Control for rotation
g Control for tilt ( )
h Switch to open the twistlocks
i Switch for alternative function
j Switch for tilt lock
k Spare
54. Spare
55. Spare
56. Spare
57. Switch for automatic spreading 20'-40'
58. Switch for 30'-stop
59. Spare
60. Switch for twistlocks, automatic/manual
61. Spare
62. Spare
63. Switch for cab tilt
64. Switch for horn
Right-hand dashboard panel, centre section
Right-hand control panel, rear section
Right-hand control panel, rear section

65. Switch for work lights on cab
66. Switch for work lights on boom
67. Switch for work lights on attachment
68. Switch for extra work lights on frame
69. Switch for back-up light
70. Switch for length adjustment of the right-hand control panel
71. Switch for height adjustment of steering wheel
When the service menus are active, the buttons can be used for
selecting up/down in the menus.
72. Switch for height adjustment of the right-hand control panel
When the service menus are active, the buttons can be used for
selecting right/left in the menus.
73. Function keys and navigation wheel for control system
74. Switch for headlights
75. Switch, interior lighting
76. Switch, revolving beacon
77. Switch for flashing hazard lights
Right-hand dashboard panel, rear section and display

4 Instruments and controls – Instruments and controls 35
Rear cab section
Rear cab section

78. Cover lid
79. Electronic box with fuses and relays
Connector VDI
80. Key lock, by pass
81. Tag reader for operator identification
82. Timer diesel heater
Rear cab section

Roof panel
Roof panel
83. Light sensor
84. Not used
85. Indicator light for locked twistlocks
86. Indicator light for contact
Roof panel 87. Indicator light for unlocked twistlocks
Control for load handling

For more information on controls for load handling and their functions,
see Operator's manual section 4.6 Load handling.

36 4 Instruments and controls – Warning and indicator lights
4.1 Warning and indicator lights

General
This section describes the warning lamps and indicator lights in the
cab. They indicate the status of subsystems/systems. An illuminated
warning lamp should be attended to immediately. An illuminated
indicator light informs of imminent action.
Warning lamps and indicator lights are grouped in the steering wheel
panel. The brightness of the lamps is adjusted according to the
ambient lighting conditions. All lamps light up briefly when the ignition
is switched on .
Numbers in brackets refer to the positions in Cab overview, page 32.
Indicator light, parking brake (16)

The light (red) is activated when the parking brake is applied.
If the indicator light flashes, the parking brake has been applied
000311
automatically (not by the operator) when the machine has stopped,

or released by the operator without the service brake pedal being
depressed.
The service brake pedal must be pressed down and the lever moved to
the released position to release the parking brake, provided that the
brake system is adequately pressurised.
To activate the parking brake it is sufficient to move the lever to the
position for applying the parking brake.
The service brake must be activated when the parking brake is
released otherwise the indicator light for the parking brake flashes
(position 16) and the event menu is displayed, see Event menu release
the parking brake, description, page 86.
Indicator light, high beams (17)
The light (blue) is activated when the high beams are on.
000309
Indicator light for active error codes (18)

The indicator light (orange) shows that the control system has one or
more active error codes.
000299
Indicator light, direction indicators (19)

The lamp (green) flashes when the direction indicators or hazard lights
are on.
000310
Warning lamp, by-pass of safety system (20)

The warning light (orange) shows the by-pass of safety functions.
NOTE
000300
By-pass takes place as long as the switch for by-pass of safety

system (position 47) is activated.

4 Instruments and controls – Warning and indicator lights 37
Travel direction indicator, Forward Neutral

Reverse (33)
Travel direction indicator for F (Forward), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse)
is activated to indicate the selected direction.
000403
Indicator light for locked twistlocks (85)
The indicator light (green) is activated when the twistlocks are locked
and thereby lock the load.
000312
Indicator light, contact (86)

The indicator light (orange) is activated when the attachment has
contact with the load.
012697
Indicator light for unlocked twistlocks (87)

The indicator light (red) is illuminated when the twistlocks are unlocked
and thereby release the load.
000314

38 4 Instruments and controls – Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the engine
4.2 Ignition key lock and start and

stop button for the engine
General
This section describes starting and stopping the engine.
Ignition key lock function
0 Ignition voltage and drivetrain are switched off, the key can
be removed.
Voltage to certain functions such as interior lighting, pause
heater, alcolock and standby voltage control units.
I Ignition voltage switched on and drivetrain activated for
starting.
016968
14. Ignition
Start and stop button's function

The start button is used to engage the starter and is held down until
the engine starts. The ignition must be in the I position in order for
the start button to work. The engine can also be stopped by holding
the button down for one second.
NOTE
The machine is equipped with an electric restart interlock, which
prevents engagement of the starter motor when the engine is
rotating.
Conditions for the starter motor to engage are that the transmission
is in neutral position and that the engine is not already running.
012816
15
15. Start button

4 Instruments and controls – Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the engine 39
Alcolock function
The machine may be equipped with an alcolock. In order to start the

machine the operator must blow into the alcolock, which then measures
the alcohol content in the breath. A successful breath test permits
the machine to be started.
For information about handling, statistics, maintenance, etc., see the

manufacturer's instructions.
016631
Alcolock

40 4 Instruments and controls – Switches
4.3 Switches
General
This section describes the switches in the cab. Each switch controls
a function.
The switches on the panels have white pilot lights that change to
a green or red function light when the function is activated. The
brightness of the switches is adjusted according to the ambient lighting
conditions. All function lights in the switches light up briefly when the
ignition is switched on. Only the functions that are available on the
machine will display a white pilot light followed by a function light.
A white light in a switch indicates a function that can be activated.

The switch changes colour when a function is activated. When the
colour has changed to green, this indicates that the function has been
switched on.
Switch for combined windscreen wiper,

windscreen/roof window, continuous (21)
Switch (green) for combined windscreen wiper on the front

012705
windscreen/roof window. Continuous wiping. Wiping stops when the

operator leaves the seat. Reactivated when the operator sits in the
driver's seat.
Wiping windscreen/roof window activated/deactivated with the press

of a button.
The switch is connected in parallel with the Switch, windscreen wiper

roof, continuous (position 25).
NOTE
Do not use the wipers on dry or dirty windscreens without first
activating the windscreen washers. The roof window is especially
sensitive to scratching and can be damaged by dry wiping.
Switch for windscreen wiper, windscreen,

continuous (21)
Switch (green) for the windscreen wiper on the front windscreen.
Continuous wiping. Wiping stops when the operator leaves the seat.
Reactivated when the operator sits in the driver's seat.
012705
Wiping windscreen is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
NOTE

4 Instruments and controls – Switches 41
Switch for combined windscreen wiper,

windscreen/roof window, intermittent (22)
Switch (green) for combined windscreen wiper on the front
012706
windscreen/roof window. Intermittent wiping. Wiping stops when the
operator leaves the seat. Reactivated when the operator sits in the
driver's seat.
Intermittent wiping windscreen/roof window activated/deactivated with

the press of a button.
The event menu appears when intermittent wiper mode is activated,

see Event menu intermittent wiper, description, page 88.
Two time intervals can be selected:

• Short interval - one press of the button.
• Long interval - a further press of the button.
• Switch off - a further press of the button.
The switch is connected in parallel with the Switch, windscreen wiper

roof, intermittent (position 24).
NOTE
Switch for windscreen wiper, windscreen,

intermittent (22)
Switch (green) for the windscreen wiper on the front windscreen.
Intermittent wiping. Wiping stops when the operator leaves the seat.
Reactivated when the operator sits in the driver's seat.
012706
Intermittent wiping windscreen is activated/deactivated with the press

of a button.


NOTE

Switch for windscreen flusher (23)

Switch (green) for washing the screens. Washing occurs in the screens
where the wiper is activated.
012707
Pressing the button when no wipers are activated activates the front
wipers or the combined wipers on the front windscreen/roof window
and washing on each screen.
Wiping temporarily changes over to continuous wiping with window

flushing.
Windscreen washing is active as long as the button is pressed down.
Event menu appears with a low washer fluid level, see Event menu low
washer fluid level, description, page 85.
NOTE
Switch, windscreen wiper roof, interval (24)

Switch (green) for windscreen wiper on roof window. Intermittent
wiping. Wiping stops when the operator leaves the seat. Reactivated
when the operator sits in the driver's seat.
012715
Intermittent wiping is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.


The switch is connected in parallel with the Switch for combined

windscreen wipers front windscreen/roof window, intermittent (22).
NOTE
Switch, windscreen wiper roof, continuous (25)

Switch (green) for windscreen wiper on roof window. Continuous
012714
Wiping is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
The switch is connected in parallel with the Switch for combined

windscreen wipers front windscreen/roof window, continuous (21).
NOTE

Switch, windscreen wiper rear, continuous (26)

Switch (green) for windscreen wiper on rear window. Continuous
012713
Wiping is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
NOTE
Switch, windscreen wiper rear, interval (27)

Switch (green) for windscreen wiper on rear window. Intermittent
012712
Intermittent wiping is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.

NOTE
Switch for manual shifting up (30)

Switch (green) to shift up one gear. Shifting up takes place from
the current gear. If automatic shifting is selected, it is automatically
switched off if the switch for manual shifting up or down is activated.
012708
At the same time the switch colour for manual shifting up and down
goes from white to green.
The current gear is shown in the operating menu.
Switch for manual shifting down (31)

Switch (green) to choose to shift down one gear. Shifting down takes
place from the current gear. If automatic shifting is selected, it is
automatically switched off if the switch for manual shifting up or down
012709
is activated. At the same time the switch colour for manual shifting up
and down goes from white to green.
Downshift is activated with the press of a button. Manual shifting is

activated.
The current gear is shown in the operating menu.
Switch for automatic shifting (32)

Switch (green) for selecting automatic shifting.
Automatic shifting is activated by pressing a button. The automatic

012710
shifting function is disabled if the switch for manual shifting up or down

is activated.

Switch for pause heater (35)
Switch (green) for pause heater. The cab fan emits heat from the
012716
engine's cooling system during short-term parking of the machine.
Instructions for use:

a. Park the machine. Let the engine idle.
b. Set desired temperature (position 41, 42).
c. Press in the switch for pause heater (position 35).
d. Switch off the ignition with the ignition key lock.
The pause heater is now activated and strives to maintain preset
temperature for the cab.
If the cab temperature drops down to the set temperature, or pause
heater has been running for the preset time, the pause heater
stops running when the engine's cooling system can no longer
deliver the heat needed.
NOTE
The higher the preset cab temperature, the shorter the operating
time for the pause heater.
Recirculation switch (36)

Recirculation switch (green) If this function is activated, air circulates
inside the compartment without fresh air being taken from outside and
is used to prevent bad air, or unpleasant odours from entering the cab.
012717
Recirculation is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
Switch for defroster (37)

The switch (green) for the defroster can be used to quickly demist the
windscreens. When the defroster is activated the function controls fan,
temperature and damper position.
012718
The defroster is activated/deactivated by pressing a button or with any

of the other switches for the system. The defroster function switches
off automatically.
Switch for reduced fan speed (38)

Switch (green) to lower fan speed in the cab. When the fan speed
is controlled with the switch the automatic fan control is disengaged.
The automatic function is reactivated with the switch for automatic
regulation of air conditioning (position 39).
012719
Reduced fan speed is activated with the press of a button.
The fan speed is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the fan speed drops, see Event menu
raise/lower fan speed, description, page 87.

Switch for automatic regulation of air conditioning

(39)
Switch (green) for automatic fan speed control, temperature control
and air distribution in the cab. With AUTO mode enabled, the control
system attempts to maintain the temperature set on the display. Fan
012720
speed, temperature control and air distribution in the cab take place
automatically.
Automatic regulation is reactivated with the press of a button if manual

control is selected with the buttons for air distribution or fan speed.
Temperature setting and fan speed are shown in the operating menu.
Switch for increased fan speed (40)

Switch (green) to increase the fan speed in the cab. When the
fan speed is controlled with the switch the automatic fan control is
disengaged. The automatic function is reactivated with the switch for
automatic regulation of air conditioning (position 39).
012721
Increased fan speed is activated with the press of a button.
The fan speed is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the fan speed increases, see Event
menu raise/lower fan speed, description, page 87.
Switch for increased temperature (41)

Switch (red) to increase the cab temperature. Setting takes place in
steps of 0.5 °C.
012723
Temperature increase is activated with the press of a button.
The temperature range is 16 °C to 28 °C. Setting of max. temperature

switches off automatic climate control (control of fan, heat and air
distribution) and sets the heat valve in the max. position.
If necessary, cab air is cooled or heated to the set temperature.
Desired cab temperature is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the cab temperature is increased,

Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description, page 87.
Switch for reduced temperature (42)

Switch (blue) to decrease the cab temperature. Setting takes place in
steps of 0.5 °C.
012722
Temperature decrease is activated with the press of a button.
The temperature range is 16 °C to 28 °C. Setting of min. temperature

switches off automatic climate control (control of fan, heat and air
distribution) and sets the heat valve in the min. position.
If necessary, cab air is cooled or heated to the set temperature.
Desired cab temperature is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the cab temperature is decreased,

Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description, page 87.

Switch for cooling (43)

Cooling function switch (green).
Cooling is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
012727
The system's cooling function does not start if the fan is switched off or
if the doors are open. The fan stops after a short period if the doors are
opened. If the doors are not closed after a further short period then the
cooling compressor will also be switched off.
Switch for air distribution, to the floor (44)

Switch (green) for air distribution, to the floor. When the air distribution
is controlled with the switch the automatic air distribution is disengaged.
012724 regulation of air conditioning (position 39).
Air distribution toward the floor is activated/deactivated by pressing a

button. The air distribution can be combined toward the floor, operator
and roof.
Switch for air distribution to the operator (45)

Switch (green) for air distribution to the operator. When the air
distribution is controlled with the switch the automatic air distribution is
disengaged. The automatic function is reactivated with the switch for
012725
automatic regulation of air conditioning (position 39).
Air distribution to the operator is activated/deactivated with a press

of the button. The air distribution can be combined toward the floor,
operator and roof.
Switch for air distribution to the roof (46)

Switch (green) for air distribution to the roof. When the air distribution is
controlled with the switch the automatic air distribution is disengaged.
012726
regulation of air conditioning (position 39).
Air distribution toward the roof is activated/deactivated by pressing a

button. The air distribution can be combined toward the floor, operator
and roof.
Switch for by-pass of safety system (47)

Bypassing the machine's safety features. Rocker switch.
As an option, the by pass can be equipped with a code lock or key lock
012733
for certain functions . Refer to the detailed description, see Bypass

0 1 with code lock, page 47.
The operator may, if the situation so requires, disconnect all safety

features on the machine.
Position 0, normal function.
Position 1, bypass of the safety system permits the following:

• Lowering of load in the event of overload.
• Locking or opening of twistlocks without full contact.
• Spreading 20'-40' with locked twistlocks.
• Lifting without indication of locked or open twistlocks.
• Lifting past height limitation on machines with limited lifting height,
see Height limitation, page 207.
The machine's overload system can still limit the lifting height.
• Rotation of attachment free of machine with rotation stop, see
Rotation stop, page 205.

• Selection of travel direction without the sensor in the driver’s seat

indicating that someone is sitting in the seat, speed is limited to
10 km/h.
(The machine adopts neutral position when no one is sitting in
the driver’s seat.)
• Engage gear without seat belt fastened, applies to machines with
seat belt requirement while driving .
• Release of the parking brake in the event of a fault in the parking
brake or without the sensor in the driver’s seat indicating that
someone is sitting in the seat.
• Use of load handling functions at reduced speed without the sensor
in the driver’s seat indicating that someone is sitting in the seat.
Warning lamp for by-pass (position 20), shows when the by-pass of
safety features is activated.
WARNING
Safety features are blocked.
No safety system is engaged!
Only use bypass in emergency situations!
WARNING
By-pass of load handling functions must not be used
during normal load handling.
damage.
Only use the bypass in emergency situations.
Bypass with code lock
Bypass with code lock means a code must be entered via the display
when certain functions are to be bypassed. The functions that can
have a code lock are divided into five groups Service technicians can
activate or disable the code lock for each group individually.
The right code must be entered in the service and settings menu in
order to activate the bypass, see 5.6.5 Menu for services and settings,
page 219. When the menus are unlocked the bypass works for all
functions.
By pass with key
By pass with key means that you can use a key to by pass certain
functions. These functions are divided into different groups. Service
technicians can activate or disable the key lock for each group
individually.
To activate the by pass, the key must be inserted in the lock and
turned. Following which, the normal switch for by-pass (position 47)
can be used to by-pass key activated functions.

Switch for electrically heated rear view mirrors

(48)
Switch (green) for electrically heated rear view mirrors. Rocker switch.
012792
0 1 Position 0 – Function for electrically heated rear view mirrors
deactivated.
Position 1 - The function electrically-heated rear view mirrors is

activated for a preset time.
If both the machine and cab are equipped with electrically heated
mirrors all of these are activated with the same switches.
If the cab is equipped with electrically heated mirrors and screens the
functions are activated with the same switches.
The event menu appears when the electrically heated mirrors

are activated and deactivated, see Event menu heating rear view
mirrors/rear windscreen, description, page 87.
Switch for electrically heated rear windscreen (48)
Switch (green) for electrically heated rear windscreen. Rocker switch.

012792
0 1 Position 0 – The function for rear windscreen heating is deactivated.
Position 1 - The function electrically-heated rear windscreen is

activated for a preset time.
If the cab is equipped with electrically heated mirrors and screens the
functions are activated with the same switches.
The event menu appears when the electrically heated rear windscreen
is activated and deactivated, see Event menu heating rear view
mirrors/rear windscreen, description, page 87.
Control lever for electrically-operated mirrors (49)
Control lever for setting the machine's mirrors.
Select left (L) or right (R) mirrors using the control lever.
Set the mirror with the help of the control lever.

015219

Switch, automatic cab tilt (50)

(Standard for DRG100-54S8)
Switch (yellow) for automatic/manual cab tilt.
This switch is used to select whether the cab should be tilted

automatically or manually.
Position 0 - Manual cab tilt. The cab is tilted with the switch for
hydraulic tilting cab (position 63).
Position 1 - Automatic cab tilt. The cab is tilted automatically when the
attachment is at a certain lifting height.
NOTE
The cab can only be tilted when the doors are closed and the boom
height (boom angle) gives room for safe cab tilt.
Cab tilt can be activated at speeds up to 15 km/h. Machine speed
is limited to 10 km/h immediately when the cab is moved from the
lowest position.
See Hydraulic cab tilting, page 208.
Switch for audio off (audio system) (52)
Switch (green) for audio off in the cab, e.g. dampening of the audio
012731
system's volume.
0 1
Position 0 – Function audio off is deactivated.
Position 1 – Function audio off is activated.
Switch for automatic spreading 20' to 40' (57)
Switch (yellow) for automatic spreading of attachment to 40'. This

function is used to give automatic spreading of attachment at
instantaneous function selection with the control lever.
To stop an ongoing automatic 20' to 40' spreading, activate spreading

in or out of with the control lever.
Position 0 – Automatic spreading 20' to 40' not activated.
Position 1 – Automatic spreading 20' to 40' activated. ( If the function

for 30' stop activated, spreading stop takes place earlier, see Switch for
spreading stop at 30' (58), page 50.)
See Automatic spreading 20'–40', page 204.
NOTE
Automatic spreading can only be activated with closed doors and
released parking brake.

Switch for spreading stop at 30' (58)
Switch (green) for spreading stop at 30' for attachment.
This function is used to adjust the spreading of the attachment to the

container size (needs adapted). The distance for spreading stop at 30'
spreading stop is fixed (normally 30' or 35').
Dampening comes into force shortly before the preset value for the
stop. To continue spreading past the stop, activate the spreading
function and hold it activated with the control lever to reach the desired
position (end position is 40').
Position 0 – Spreading stop not activated.
Position 1 – Spreading stop activated. While spreading is in progress,

damping and stop take place automatically at the distance for spreading
stop.
See Spreading stop at 30' , page 204.
The function can be activated together with automatic spreading 20' to

40' , see Automatic spreading 20'–40', page 204.
Switch for twistlocks, automatic/manual locking

(60)
Switch (green) for locking the twistlocks. The switch is spring-loaded in
position 2.
Position 1 - Twistlocks are locked automatically when there is contact

with the load. The parking brake must be OFF, see position 1 and
indicator light for parking brake, position 16.
Position 0 - Locking of twistlocks not activated.
Position 2 - Twistlocks are locked manually. Button spring-returns.
See Instructions for top lift attachment, page 198.
Switch, cab tilt (63)

(Standard for DRG100-54S8)
Switch (green) for cab tilt up down. Rocker switch. The operator's
door(s) must be closed and the control breaker for hydraulics not
activated.
Position 1 - The cab is tilted down. The switch must be pressed and
held throughout the movement.
Position 0 – Cab is stationary.
Position 2 - The cab is tilted up. The switch must be pressed and held
throughout the movement.
NOTE
lowest position.
See Hydraulic cab tilting, page 208.

Switch for horn (64)

Horn switch on the joystick. Rocker switch.
Switch for work lights on cab (65)

Switch (green) for work lights on the cab. Also activates headlights,
rear lights and side running lights.
012760
Work lights on the cab are activated/deactivated with the press of a
button.
Work lights are turned off after idling for 5 minutes, extra work lights
after 2 minutes. Work lights are turned on again at throttle application,
gearshifting or activation of any load handling function.
Switch for work lights on boom (66)

Switch (green) for work lights on the boom. Also activates headlights,
rear lights and side running lights.
012762
Work lights on the boom are activated/deactivated with the press of a

button.
The work lights on the boom are switched off after 5 minutes of running
at idling speed. Work lights are turned on again at throttle application,
Switch for work lights on attachment (67)

Switch (green) for work lights on the attachment. Also activates
headlights, rear lights and side running lights.
012763
Extra work lights are activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
Work lights are turned off after idling for 5 minutes, extra work lights
after 2 minutes. Work lights are turned on again at throttle application,
Switch for extra work lights on frame (68)
Switch (green) for extra work lights on lamp cluster housings on front
012764
mudguards. Also activates headlights, rear lights and side running

lights.
Extra work lights on the frame are activated/deactivated with the press
of a button.
Extra work lights on the frame are switched off after 2 minutes of
running at idling speed. Work lights are turned on again at throttle
application, gearshifting or activation of any load handling function.
Switch for back-up light (69)

Switch (green) for back-up light.
Back-up light is activated/deactivated by pressing the button when

012765
travel direction reverse is selected. The function of the back-up lights

is reset after ignition off/on to be switched on when travel direction
reverse is selected.

Switch for length adjustment of the right-hand

control panel (70)
Switch (white) for length adjustment of the right-hand control panel.
Length adjustment is activated with the press of a button.
When you are logged into the control system's menus, the switch for
navigating up and down in the menus acts as a complement to the
function keys on the display.
012766
Switch for height adjustment of steering wheel
(71)
Switch (white) for height adjustment of steering wheel.
Height adjustment is activated with the press of a button.

012768
Switch for height adjustment of the right-hand

control panel (72)
Switch (white) for height adjustment of the right-hand control panel.
Height adjustment is activated with the press of a button.
When you are logged into the control system's menus, the switch for
navigating right and left in the menus acts as a complement to the
function keys on the display.
012767
Function keys and navigation wheel for control

system (73)
Function keys and navigation wheel for control system, see 4.11
Control system, page 71.
Switch for headlights (74)

Switch (green) for headlights. Also activates tail lights and side running
lights.
012771
The headlights are activated/deactivated with the press of a button.

Switch, interior lighting (75)

Switch (green) for interior lighting in cab.
The lighting is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
012772
Switch for revolving beacon (76)
Switch (green) for revolving beacon used to attract attention in
connection with hazards.
012773
The revolving beacon is activated/deactivated with the press of a
button.
Switch for flashing hazard lights (77)

Switch (red) for flashing hazard lights used to attract attention in
connection with parking hazard.
012774
The warning beacon is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.

54 4 Instruments and controls – Travel direction selector and parking brake
4.4 Travel direction selector and

parking brake
General
This section describes the travel direction selector (position 1) that is
used to choose the direction and for the parking brake.
1
015215
1. Travel direction selector on steering column
Selecting direction of travel

Travel direction is selected with the travel direction selector on:
F P • steering column
• control lever, see Control lever (53), page 58
• mini-wheel, see Mini-wheel, page 63
• joystick control, see Joystick control, page 64
N The lever is spring-loaded and the selected direction of travel is shown
on the steering wheel panel.
The current gear is shown on the display.
Selecting direction of travel:

• F - Forward. Move the lever forward for forward drive.
015430
R • N - Neutral. Neutral. Move the lever up or down for neutral.

• R - Reverse. Move the lever backward for reverse drive.
Travel direction selector on steering column
Manual shifting up and down is performed using the switch for manual
shifting up (position 30) and the switch for manual shifting down
(position 31). Selection of automatic shifting is done with the switch for
automatic shifting (position 32).

4 Instruments and controls – Travel direction selector and parking brake 55
Parking brake
Activation of the parking brake is performed with the travel direction
F P selector. Lift the control upward toward the steering wheel and then
move it forward to the parking braking position. The parking brake
indicator light shows when the parking brake is activated, see Indicator
light, parking brake (16), page 36.
Deactivate the parking brake by pressing down the service brake pedal
N and then move the travel direction selector from the parking position
to neutral/gear position. The event menu appears when you try to
release the parking brake without the service brake being pressed
down or when the brake pressure is too low, see Event menu release
the parking brake, description, page 86.
015430
R DANGER
or extreme danger!

56 4 Instruments and controls – Multi-function lever
4.5 Multi-function lever

General
This section describes the functions of the multi-function lever (position
2 2).
015221
Light control
With headlights on: On machines with LED type headlights, the control
has no effect on the headlights.
With headlights off: The multi-function lever is used as a headlamp

015433
flasher. Move the control upward for light signal, return is automatic.
On machines with high and low beam, the multi-function lever is

used for changing between high and low beam. Move the control
upward to switch between full and low beam.
On machines with work lights on the frame, you can choose to

control the work lights on the frame with the light control (on in high
beam position).
Horn
Move the lever inwards towards the steering wheel for horn.
The horn can also be activated with the switch on the control lever,
015431
see Control lever (53), page 58.
Direction indicators
Move the lever backward or forward to indicate left and right travel
indication respectively.
015432

4 Instruments and controls – Load handling 57
4.6 Load handling

General
This section describes the functions of the control for load handling.
The control governs functions for handling boom and attachments. It
is possible to vary the speed of the different hydraulic functions by
varying the extent of lever deflection, i.e. lift and extension, etc. It is
also possible to vary the speed of the hydraulic functions with the
engine speed (rpm).
Boom and the attachment movements are dampened automatically

near the end positions.
The lowering speed is dampened automatically when the

attachment approaches a container via a separate sensor
NOTE
Position of a control is need-adapted and may thus differ from this
section. See the plates on the machine.
Right-hand control panel

The control panel to the right of the operator is adjustable in several
ways for optimum ergonomics.
1. Panel position is longitudinal.
Adjust the control panel to the desired position, see Switch for
length adjustment of the right-hand control panel (70), page 52.
2. Panel position is vertical.
Adjust the control panel to the desired position, see Switch for
height adjustment of the right-hand control panel (72), page 52.
3. The angle of the rear section.
Pull the control (position A) upwards and adjust the panel manually
A. Control for adjusting the rear section to the desired position.
B. Control for adjusting the centre section 4. The angle of the centre section.
Pull the control (position B) upwards and adjust the panel manually
to the desired position.
5. The angle of the control lever's grip.
Contact service.

58 4 Instruments and controls – Control for load handling
4.6.1 Control for load handling

Control lever (53)
This section describes the functions of the control lever (position 53).
Some hydraulic functions are controlled by switches, see 4.3 Switches,
page 40.
It is possible to vary the speed of the different hydraulic functions, i.e.

lift, lower, etc., by varying the extent of the lever deflection. It is also
possible to vary the speed of the hydraulic functions with the engine
speed (rpm).
WARNING
In an emergency! In the event of undesired
activation/movement of a function.
Risk of personal injury and/or property damage!
IMMEDIATELY TURN OFF all working hydraulics by
pressing the CONTROL BREAKER for hydraulics.
NOTE
The operator must sit in the driver's seat, otherwise all hydraulic
functions are stopped.
With hydraulic cab tilting: The doors must be closed or the cab in
lower position, otherwise all hydraulic functions are stopped.

4 Instruments and controls – Control for load handling 59
Functions, control lever
Functions, control lever
53. Lift, lower [Straight lift]/Boom in, boom out

LIFT – pull the whole control lever backward (Y-). b. Side shift [Spreading] / Rotation [Tilt ]
SIDE SHIFT RIGHT - move the upper thumb control to
LOWER – move the whole control lever forward (Y+). the right (X+).
BOOM OUT – move the whole control lever to the right SIDE SHIFT LEFT - move the upper thumb control to
(X+). the left (X-).
BOOM IN – move the whole control lever to the left (X-). SPREADING OUT - press the shift key and move the
upper thumb control to the right (X+).
STRAIGHT LIFT UP – press the shift key and pull the
SPREADING IN - press the shift key and move the upper
whole
thumb control to the left (X-).
control lever backward (Y-).
ROTATION CLOCKWISE - move the upper thumb control
STRAIGHT LIFT DOWN – press the shift key and move forward (Y+).
the whole
control lever forward (Y+). ROTATION ANTICLOCKWISE - pull the upper thumb
control backward (Y-).
Speed varies with lever deflection and engine speed. TILT FORWARD – press the shift key and move the
a. Selecting direction of travel. The control is upper thumb control forward (Y+).
spring-loaded, the current gear is shown in the display and TILT BACKWARD – press the shift key and pull the
the selected direction of travel is shown on the steering upper thumb control backward (Y-).
wheel panel.
c. Opening the twistlocks.
Travel direction FORWARD - move the lower thumb
control forward. Lower the attachment so that contact is obtained, and
depress the button to open twistlocks.
Travel direction NEUTRAL – move the lower thumb
control up or down. d. Alternative function "Shift key". The switch changes the
function of the other controls on the control lever.
Travel direction REVERSE - move the lower thumb control
backward. e. Tilt lock
f. Spare
64. Horn.

60 4 Instruments and controls – Light panel on boom
Functions of control lever, Cobra (53)
1 2 3 4
5 6
7 8 9
004669
1. Variable tilt attachment
2. Locking tilt
3. Rotation, attachment
4. Side shift, attachment
5. Synchronised lift
6. Boom out or in
7. Extension (spreading) attachment 20'-40'
8. Release of twistlocks
If there is no contact, the button controls the horn.
9. Lift or lower boom
4.6.2 Light panel on boom

Light panel on boom for top lift attachment
There is a light panel on the boom that is helpful when handling
A B C
loads with the top lift attachment. The panel uses coloured lights to
indicate if and when twistlocks are locked/unlocked, that is, if the load
is secured/not secured.
A. Twistlocks locked (load secured), green.
B. Contact attachment's four corners, orange.
C. Twistlocks unlocked (load not secured), red.
NOTE
000336
The lights for load securing on the boom flash when there are
Light panel on boom, top lift attachment
active fault codes on the sensors for load securing, which means
that the load securing functions are blocked.

4 Instruments and controls – Pedals 61
4.7 Pedals
General
This section describes the machine's foot-operated functions.
NOTE
The default pedal height setting can be changed by adjusting the
angle of their console. The adjustment must be performed by a
service technician.
11
015214
12
11. Accelerator
12. Brake pedal
Accelerator (11)
The accelerator pedal (position 11) is electronic and controls the engine
speed via the CAN bus and the machine's control system.
Brake pedals (12)

The brake pedals (position 12) are hydraulic and connected to the
machine's hydraulic system. The brake pedals are used for service
brake.
The accumulator stores energy so that there is brake pressure even if

the engine stops. The event menu appears if the accumulator pressure
drops too low, see Event menu low accumulator pressure, description,
page 78.
The service brake is combined with declutching the transmission and

at a certain brake pressure the drive is fully declutched. The brake
pressure level is adjustable within specific minimum and maximum
values and adjustability is dependent on the machine model, contact
Cargotec service if values need to be adjusted.

62 4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel
4.8 Steering wheel

General
This section describes controls for steering. The following alternatives
are available for steering the machine:
• adjustable steering wheel (position 3)
• joystick (position 13)
• mini steering wheel (position 13)
Steering wheel
Clockwise rotation of the steering wheel steers the machine to the
right, and vice versa.
The steering wheel's (position 3) inclination and height can be set to

the desired operating position.
1. Steering wheel angle in the longitudinal direction.
To adjust: Move the control on the steering column upward, angle
the steering wheel in the longitudinal direction and lock the control
when the steering wheel is in the desired position.
015216
2. Steering wheel angle in the lateral direction.

To adjust: To adjust: move the steering wheel's right-hand side
upward, angle the steering wheel sideways and lock the control
when the steering wheel is in the desired position.
3. Steering wheel's height.
To adjust: set the desired height with the Switch for height
adjustment of the steering wheel, see Switch for height adjustment
of steering wheel (71), page 52.
015217

4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel 63
Mini-wheel
3 Mini-steering wheel control is an electro-hydraulic system, mounted in

the left arm rest, to steer the machine with an ergonomically designed
2 rotating plate. Clockwise rotation of the steering wheel steers the
machine to the right, and vice versa. The wheels always follow the
1 position of the mini-wheel. If the steering wheel is released, both the
4
mini-wheel and the wheels remain in the set position.
5 The standard steering wheel is equipped with sensors that detect any
steering wheel movement in an emergency situation. If the operator
starts to steer using the standard steering wheel, the mini steering
wheel is disengaged.
1. Direction indicators.
2. Mini-wheel.
The steering wheel's position on the arm rest is adjustable.
3. Switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.
Conditions: The speed must be below 3 km/h. If the speed
exceeds 3 km/h mini-wheel cannot be engaged.
6 NOTE
A sensor in the armrest mount on the driver's seat detects the
armrest angle. If the arm rest is angled upward, the mini steering
wheel function is deactivated at a certain angle and must be
activated again with the switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.
4. Travel direction selector F/N/R. The switch is spring-loaded, the

current gear is shown in the display and the selected direction of
travel is shown on the steering wheel panel.
Travel direction FORWARD – move the switch forward.
Travel direction NEUTRAL – move the switch up and down.
015422
Travel direction REVERSE – move the switch backward.

5. With headlights switched off: The switch is used for the headlamp
flasher.
If the switch is held depressed for more than 2 seconds then the
windscreen and roof wipers are activated and make one sweep.
Machines with high and low beam and headlights switched on:
The switch is used to change between high and low beam.
6. Arm rest. Can be folded up to easily enter and leave the driver's
seat.

64 4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel
Joystick control
Joystick control functions as the mini steering wheel, with the difference
that the mini steering wheel is replaced by a lever that is moved
left/right in order to steer the machine.
The standard steering wheel is equipped with sensors that detect any
steering wheel movement in an emergency situation. If the operator
starts to steer using the standard steering wheel, joystick steering is
disengaged.
1. Joystick.
The joystick (1) can be rotated 180º to adjust the distance to the
switches (2–5).
2. Direction indicators.
3. Travel direction selector F/N/R. The switch is spring-loaded, the
current gear is shown in the display and the selected direction of
travel is shown on the steering wheel panel.
Travel direction FORWARD – move the switch forward.
Travel direction NEUTRAL - move the switch right or left.
Travel direction REVERSE – move the switch backward.
4. With headlights switched off: The switch is used for the headlamp
flasher.
If the switch is held depressed for more than 2 seconds then the
windscreen and roof wipers are activated and make one sweep.
Machines with high and low beam and headlights switched on:
The switch is used to change between high and low beam.
5. Switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.
Conditions: The speed must be below 3 km/h. If the speed
exceeds 3 km/h mini-wheel cannot be engaged.
NOTE
A sensor in the armrest mount on the driver's seat detects the
armrest angle. If the arm rest is angled upward, the mini steering
wheel function is deactivated at a certain angle and must be
activated again with the switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.

4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel 65
Adjustment of the mini steering wheel/joystick

control
1. Adjusting the mini steering wheel longitudinally.
Adjust the mini steering wheel (position 1) to the desired position.
1
2. Adjusting the arm rest longitudinally.
To adjust: Loosen the knob (position 2) and adjust the arm rest to
the desired position. Lock the arm rest with the knob when the arm
rest is in the desired position.
015423
3. Height of the mini steering wheel/joystick control.

To adjust: Loosen the knob (position 3) and adjust the arm rest
to the desired position. Tighten the knob when the arm rest is in
the desired position.
4. Longitudinal angle of the mini steering wheel/joystick control.
To adjust: Loosen the Allen screw (position 4) and angle the
bracket for mini steering wheel/joystick control to the desired
position. Tighten the Allen screw when the bracket is in the desired
015424
position.
4
3
5. Sideways position of the mini steering wheel/joystick control.

To adjust: Loosen the Allen screw (position 5) and turn the arm
rest and bracket for the mini steering wheel/joystick control to the
desired position. Tighten the Allen screws when the armrest and
bracket are in the desired position.
015425

66 4 Instruments and controls – Driver's seat
4.9 Driver's seat

General
This section describes the driver's seat (position 10) in the cab.
Driver's seat
Standard seat
Standard seat
The driver's seat is equipped with several controls for adjustment as
11 follows (adjustment is easier when nobody is sitting in the seat):
1. Seat belt, 2-point.
Seat belt, 3-point .
2. Seat tilt.
3. Horizontal suspension (forward/backward) .
4. Seat length.
10 5. Height of seat.
Mechanical elevation of seat height:
1
9 Turn the knob clockwise or anticlockwise until desired height is
obtained.
Air suspension elevation of seat height:
2
Lift the control up to increase seat height or alternatively press
8 the control down to reduce seat height. The suspension adapts
automatically to the bodyweight of the operator.
3 An indicator shows green when the correct height is reached. The
7 indicator turns red when the seat's suspension is set outside the
comfort mode.
4 6. Longitudinal adjustment.
Release the seat using the lever and move the seat forwards or
5 6 backwards.
7. Back rest angle.
Release the lock with the lever, set the desired tilt angle and
release the lever to lock in the desired position.
8. Adjusting arm rest, left .
9. Lower back (lumbar) support.
Turn knob until desired firmness in lumbar support is obtained.
10. Seat heating .
017255
11. Adjusting the head rest .

Driver's seat with adjustment possibilities

4 Instruments and controls – Driver's seat 67
Optional seat Grammer
Optional seat Grammer
The driver's seat is equipped with several setting controls, they have
the following functions:
1. Seat heating.
2. Upper lumbar support.
Press + or - until the required firmness in the lumbar support is
reached.
3. Lower lumbar support.
reached.
4. Back rest angle.
5. Horizontal suspension (forward/backward).
Control forward = locked.
Control backward = suspension.
To lock the suspension, move the control forward and then press
the seat backward until a click is heard when the suspension locks.
6. Longitudinal adjustment.
Release the seat with the lever, set the desired distance and
7. Height and angle of the seat
Angle setting: Set the vertical dampening (position 8) to the softest
position, sit on the seat, pull the control upward and release
directly. The suspension adapts automatically to the bodyweight.
Height control: Move the control upward to increase the seat
height or downward to lower the seat height.
8. Vertical dampening (up/down).
Control to the left = soft.
Control straight up = medium.
Control to the right = hard.
9. Seat length.
Release the length with the control, set the desired length and
release the control to lock in the desired position.
10. Seat tilt.
Release the tilt with the control, set the desired tilt and release the
control to lock in the desired position.
11. Seat belt, 2-point (not shown in the figure).
Seat belt, 3-point (not shown in the figure).

68 4 Instruments and controls – Driver's seat
Optional seat Isringhausen
Optional seat Isringhausen
15
The driver's seat is equipped with several setting controls, they have
the following functions:
1. Seat belt, 2-point.
Seat belt, 3-point .
2. Seat tilt.
Release the tilt with the control, set the desired tilt and release the
control to lock in the desired position.
1 3. Seat length.
14
Release the length with the control, set the desired length and
release the control to lock in the desired position.
13 4. Longitudinal adjustment.
2 Release the seat with the bar, set the desired distance and release
12 the bar to lock in the desired position.
5. Height adjustment
11
3 Adjust the height of the seat using the control.
6. Vertical dampening (up/down).
7. Horizontal suspension (forward/backward).
022056
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8. Lower lumbar support.

reached.
Driver's seat with adjustment possibilities 9. Upper lumbar support.
reached.
10. Side support.
Steplessly adjustable support for the back.
Press + or - to adjust the side support.
11. Ventilation seat.
12. Seat heating.
13. Setting for ventilation seat and seat heating.
14. Back rest angle.
15. Adjusting the head rest .
Passenger seat
Passenger seat
As an option, the machine can be equipped with a folding passenger

seat with two-point belt on the left of the driver's seat.
020552

4 Instruments and controls – Heating / Air conditioning 69
4.10 Heating / Air conditioning

General information on air conditioning
This section describes the Air conditioning function, ECC.
38 39 40 43
The air conditioning system automatically regulates air flow and air
distribution in the cab and it constantly aims towards regulating the
37 temperature to a selected comfort level by heating or cooling the air in
the cab to the selected temperature.
36
The air conditioning system receives heat from the engine's cooling
system and provides heat when the engine is warm. Cooling
35 performance is generated by the cooling compressor (for ECC).
The system is controlled by fan, heat and air distribution as well as

function for recirculation and defroster:
012820
41 42 44 45 46 • Automatic control of the fan speed, temperature control and air
distribution in the cab is activated by switch (position 39). With
Panel for heating and air conditioning (position 6) AUTO mode enabled, the control system attempts to maintain
the temperature selected on the display. Both fan speed and
temperature control are automatic.
• Heat (and cooling performance for ECC) is controlled
with temperature switches (position 41, 42). Cooling is
activated/deactivated with the switch for cooling (position 43).
When adjusting the temperature the event menu appears on the
display, Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description,
page 87.
• If necessary, the airflow can be adjusted manually with the switch
for the fan (position 38, 40). When adjusting the fan speed the
event menu appears on the display, Event menu raise/lower fan
speed, description, page 87.
• If necessary, the air distribution can be adjusted manually with the
switch for the air distribution (position 44, 45, 46). The fresh air
intake is equipped with a fine filter. Filter replacement is indicated
on the display by a filter monitor.
NOTE
015218
Filter replacement is first indicated in the event of high fan capacity

use.
• If necessary, the recirculation of cab air can be activated/deactivated

with the switch for recirculation (position 36).
Air distribution in the cab • Defroster for fast demisting of windows is activated/deactivated
with the switch for defroster (position 37).
• The pause heater is activated/deactivated with the pause heater
switch (position 35) .
NOTE
Operator's door and windows shall be closed for satisfactory
function of the system.
A short while after one of the doors has been opened, the fan is
switched off. After an additional period the air conditioning system's
cooling compressor shuts off (cooling function and air- drying
stops). Close the door and the cooling compressor and fan are
activated again. The function can be turned off via the machine's
settings in the service menus.
The current settings for the heating/air conditioning system are shown
in the display.
For information on the switches, see 4.3 Switches, page 40.
For information on the display, see 4.11 Control system, page 71.

70 4 Instruments and controls – Heating / Air conditioning
Diesel heater
As an option the machine can be equipped with diesel heater for

heating the cab and the engine without the engine being started. The
diesel heater heats and circulates the engine's coolant. The diesel
heater is controlled by a separate timer, with the display mounted on
the panel below the rear window on the left-hand side of the cab.
When the coolant has reached the required temperature, the cab fan is
activated in order to heat the cab. If the battery voltage becomes too
low then the heater is switched off automatically.
A. Menu bar For setting the diesel heater's timer, see Setting the diesel heater, page
193.
B. Status field (Main menu)
Input field (Submenu)
C. Selection front / rear
D. Button 1
E. Button 2

4 Instruments and controls – Control system 71
4.11 Control system

General
This section describes the control system (position 73) and the
information that can be obtained from the operating menus (position 5).
The machine is equipped with an electronic system for control and

monitoring of the machine's different functions.
The system gives the operator information in the form of:

• Error code information
Three levels of error code information can be shown. In the event
of a new error code, error code information is shown over the
entire display. See 5.3 Error codes, page 100.
• Operating information
Operating information includes, for example, machine speed,
engine rpm, fuel level, etc.
• Event-controlled information
Event-controlled information is, e.g. contact and overload.
Information is presented on the display (position a). The function keys

(position c-e) are used to navigate the display menus and confirm
selections. Figures are stated with example data.
The information in the display can be selected to show values with

metric (SI) or imperial (US) units, see Setting of display units, page 211.
a. Display
b. Pop-up for button function
c. Enter/YES/Save
d. Navigate through menus/adjust values with the
wheel or buttons , , or
e. Exit/NO

72 4 Instruments and controls – Control system
Description
The loop for the operating menus is described in this section.
Example of operating menus

1. Operating menu 6. Transmission and hydraulics operating menu
2. Operating menu trip computer work shift 7. Operating menu electrical system
3. Operating menu scales 8. Operating menu system
4. Operating menu load counter and extra functions 9. Operating menu load centre
5. Engine operating menu

4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus 73
4.11.1 Operating menus

Description
After starting the machine the operating menu is displayed with engine
speed, speed, time, fuel level and information on the current setting for
the heating or air conditioning system.
a. Time.
b. Field for the four event menus with the highest priority and which
have status indicators. When there are only up to two event menus
with status indicators, status for heating or air conditioning is
shown in the lower part of the field.
c. Fuel economy. The green field indicates economical driving while
the red field indicates uneconomical driving that consumes a lot
of fuel.
d. Speed in km/h.
e. Eco Drive Mode setting. Eco Drive Mode, page 181. Selected
mode has white text, the row is only shown on machines with Eco
Drive Mode.
f. Fuel level.
g. Current gear.
h. Engine speed.
i. Utilised load capacity, the bar shows load 0-100%.
j. Operating time in hours (h).
k. AdBlue level (only applies to certain engine options).
l. Scales, current weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds).
4.11.1.1 Operating menu trip computer work shift

Operating menu trip computer work shift, description
Trip computer for work shift shows current work shift machine statistics
since last reset to zero.
a. Instantaneous fuel consumption in litres per hour.
b. Average fuel consumption, in litres per hour.
c. Estimated operating hours to empty tank in hours and minutes.
d. Current engine speed in revolutions per minute.
e. Current speed in km/h.
f. Average speed in km/h.
g. Driving distance in kilometres.
h. Number of lifts.
Trip computer work shift is reset automatically if the machine has been
switched off for longer than two hours or manually with .
4.11.1.2 Operating menu scales

Operating menu scale, description
a. Displays the tare in tonnes or lbs (pounds).
b. Current weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds) (net weight).
c. Total weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds) (gross weight).
To operate the scales, see Scales, page 206.

74 4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus
4.11.1.3 Operating menu load counter
Operating menu load counter, description
a. Number of lifts counter 1, (top lift)

b. Number of lifts counter 2, (top lift)
To reset the load counter, see Load counter, page 206.
4.11.1.4 Engine operating menu
Engine operating menu, description

a. Shows current engine coolant temperature in °C or °F.
b. Shows current engine oil pressure in bar or psi.
a b
014519
4.11.1.5 Transmission and hydraulics operating menu
Transmission and hydraulics operating menu,

description
a. Shows the current transmission oil temperature in °C or °F.
b. Shows the current hydraulic system oil temperature in °C or °F.
c. Shows the current oil temperature of the brake system in °C or °F.

4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus 75
4.11.1.6 Operating menu electrical system
Operating menu electrical system, description

a. Shows the current battery voltage in volts.
4.11.1.7 Operating menu system
Operating menu system, description

a. Number of active error codes with error code level stop.
b. Number of active error codes with error code level warning.
c. Number of active error codes with error code level information.
d. Menu for customer settings such as date and time, SI/US units, Eco
Drive Mode, automatic start and stop function and language.
e. Menu for statistics, history and operating hours.
f. Menu for services and settings.
g. Menu for machine check.
h. Menu for active error codes.
i. Menu for inactive error codes.
For a more detailed description of the different submenus, see 5.6

Customer settings via display, page 209.
4.11.1.8 Operating menu load centre monitoring
Operating menu load centre monitoring

a. Shows current weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds).
b. Shows load centre distance from front wheels in metres or inches.
c. Shows how much of the machine's capacity is being used for the
current load and load centre distance.

76 4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus
4.11.1.9 Operating menu tyre pressure monitoring
Operating menu tyre pressure, description
Operating menu tyre pressure shows the current pressure in the tyres
and, together with the event menus, warns of low tyre pressure in two
stages with a coloured frame around the tyre in question.
a. Shows the air pressure in the left-hand steering wheel in bar or psi.
b. Shows the air pressure in the right-hand steering wheel in bar or
psi.
c. Shows the air pressure in the left-hand outer drive wheel in bar
or psi.
d. Shows the air pressure in the left-hand inner drive wheel in bar
or psi.
e. Shows the air pressure in the right-hand inner drive wheel in bar
or psi.
f. Shows the air pressure in the right-hand outer drive wheel in bar
or psi.
Green frame indicates that the tyre pressure is approved.
Yellow frame indicates that the tyre pressure is high or low and activates
the event menu, see Event menu tyre pressure, description, page 82.
Red frame indicates that the tyre pressure is incorrect (too high or low)
and activates the event menu, see Event menu incorrect tyre pressure,
description, page 78.

4 Instruments and controls – Event menus 77
4.11.2 Event menus

General
Event menu categories
The control system attracts the operator's attention to important

information by showing the event menus on the control system display.
a The event menus are divided into the categories: STOP, WARNING,
INFO and NOTICE. Each menu is displayed with an icon with a border
b around it. The severity of the menu is indicated by the colour of the
border around the function symbol.
Some event menus give an audio signal to attract the operator's

attention.
014952
Table Event menu categories
Example figure STOP Red border.
a. The colour of the border indicates the category
of the event menu. WARNING Yellow border.
b. Symbol for the current function. INFO Grey border.

NOTICE No border.
Event menus with the level STOP, WARNING and INFO menus can
be acknowledged with otherwise they automatically disappear
when the state that generated the event ends. Event menus with
the level NOTICE automatically disappear. Menus that have been
acknowledged can be displayed with the current symbols in the status
field to the left. The event menus are ranked according to a priority
order in which those with the highest priority are displayed in the status
field. Not all event menus have status indicators and no icon will appear
in the status field for these. If there are more than four active event
menus, those with the highest priority are displayed, yet all menus
with status indicators are placed in a queue and are displayed when
there is space in the status field. If there is space in the status field,
information for the heating or air conditioning system will be shown in
the lower part of the field.
How each event menu affects the machine's different functions is

described under each event menu.

78 4 Instruments and controls – Event menus
4.11.2.1 Event menu brake temperature
Event menu brake temperature, description

The figure is shown if:
• the temperature of the brakes is too high.
The machine's speed is limited for safety reasons when the
temperature is too high.
If the figure is shown, check that the hydraulic oil cooler for the brake
tank on the left-hand side of the machine has been activated and allow
the machine to run at idle until the temperature of the brakes has
014984
reached normal level. The display then disappears. The display can be
removed with the function key .
4.11.2.2 Event menu low accumulator pressure
Event menu low accumulator pressure, description

• The hydraulic oil pressure in the brake system is too low. The red
border is not displayed for a specific time during startup when the
pressure is being built up. The current pressure is shown in the
menu.
The event menu disappears when the hydraulic oil pressure has
reached the right level. The display can be removed with the function
015440
key .
4.11.2.3 Event menu incorrect tyre pressure
Event menu incorrect tyre pressure, description

• The tyre pressure becomes too low. Current tyre pressure for all
tyres is shown in the menu, a tyre with pressure too low has a
red frame in the menu.
• The tyre pressure becomes too high. Current tyre pressure for all
tyres is shown in the menu, a tyre with pressure too high has a
red frame in the menu.
If the figure is shown (and speed limitation occurs):

• Set down the load in a safe manner and immediately call a service
technician to check the tyre pressures.
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure means that the stability of the
machine is reduced and that the tyres and rims are
subjected to abnormal loads.
Do not use a machine with incorrect tyre pressure.
The event menu disappears when the tyre pressure has reached the
correct level. The display can be removed with the function key .

4.11.2.4 Event menu overload
Event menu overload, description

The figure is shown when:
• The load on the steering axle is too low. The lifting capacity has
reached 100% in accordance with the load curve for the machine.
• Boom movement is limited because lifting capacity has reached
100% in accordance with the load curve for the machine.
Only boom in is permitted.
In the event that the image is shown, the machine's load functions
are limited:
• Retract the boom to reduce the risk of tipping. The display then
disappears.
In an emergency situation, the safety system bypass switch
(position 47) can be used to lower the load.
WARNING
No safety system is engaged! Risk of roll-over and
tipping over!
Only use bypass in emergency situations!
4.11.2.5 Event menu overload steering axle
Event menu overload steering axle, description

Too high a load on the steering axle involves reduced lateral stability
during operation and a risk of damage to the steering axle's tyres and
rims.

• Machine speed is limited so that the load on the steering axle
reaches the limit.
Permissible speed is dependent on the current steering axle load;
speed is limited dynamically depending on axle weight on the
steering axle.
If the figure is shown and speed limitation occurs:

• Lower the load or attachment or move it forward to reduce pressure
on the steering axle. The display then disappears.
• Reduce speed. The display then disappears.
NOTE
In the event of high load on the steering axle, wear on steering axle
and tyres is high and lateral stability is also lower.
The display can be removed with the function key .

4.11.2.6 Event menu overload drive axle
Event menu overload drive axle, description

Too high a load on the drive axle involves a risk of damage to the drive
axle's tyres and rims.

• Machine speed is limited so that the load on the drive axle reaches
the limit.
Permissible speed is dependent on the current drive axle load;
speed is limited dynamically depending on axle weight on the
drive axle.
If the figure is shown and speed limitation occurs:

• Operate the load to operating position. The display then
disappears.
• Slide the load or attachment back in order to reduce pressure on
the drive axle. The display then disappears.
• Reduce speed. The display then disappears.
4.11.2.7 The event menu parking brake not activated

and no operator in the driver's seat
The event menu parking brake not activated and no

operator in the driver's seat, description
• The parking brake is not activated and the operator is not sitting
in the driver's seat.
The event menu disappears when the operator sits in the driver's seat,
or when the parking brake is activated. The display can be removed
with the function key .
015441
4.11.2.8 Event menu engine coolant temperature
Event menu engine coolant temperature, description

• The coolant temperature is high.
If the figure is shown, check that the engine's cooling fan has been
activated and allow the machine to run at idle until the coolant
temperature has reached normal level. The display then disappears.
014987

4.11.2.9 Event menu oil temperature transmission
Event menu oil temperature transmission, description

• Transmission oil temperature is high.
If the figure is shown, check that the engine's cooling fan has been
activated and allow the machine to remain at idle until the transmission
oil has reached normal temperature. The display then disappears. The
display can be removed with the function key .
014988
4.11.2.10 Event menu height limitation
Event menu height limitation, description

• Set maximum lifting height is reached. The machine's current
height is shown in the display.
If the figure is shown, lower or retract the boom. The display then
disappears. The function can be by-passed, see Height limitation,
page 207.
4.11.2.11 Event menu oil temperature hydraulics
Event menu oil temperature hydraulics, description

• The hydraulic system's oil temperature is high.
If the figure is shown, let the machine stand and idle until the hydraulic
oil has reached the normal temperature. The display then disappears.
If the figure is shown, check that the hydraulic oil cooler for the
015479
hydraulic tank on the right-hand side of the machine has been activated
and allow the machine to run at idle until the hydraulic oil has reached
normal temperature. The display then disappears. The display can be
4.11.2.12 Event menu AdBlue end
Event menu AdBlue end, description

• There is a fault in the supply of AdBlue.
• The engine indicates low AdBlue level.
Emission is control not working and engine power is limited.
If the figure is shown, top up the AdBlue. The display then disappears.
016679
NOTE
Fuel and AdBlue must be filled at the same time.

4.11.2.13 Event menu tyre pressure
Event menu tyre pressure, description

• The tyre pressure becomes low. Current tyre pressure for all tyres
is shown in the menu, a tyre with low pressure has a yellow frame
in the menu.
• The tyre pressure becomes high. Current tyre pressure for all
tyres is shown in the menu, a tyre with high pressure has a yellow
frame in the menu.
In case the figure is shown:

• Finish the work shift and call a service technician as soon as
possible to check the tyre pressures.
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure means that the stability of the
machine is reduced and that the tyres and rims are
subjected to abnormal loads.
Do not use a machine with incorrect tyre pressure.
The event menu disappears when the tyre pressure has reached the
correct level. The display can be removed with the function key .
4.11.2.14 Event menu low accumulator pressure
Event menu low accumulator pressure, description

• Try to release the parking brake when the accumulator pressure
is low.
If the figure is shown, wait until the pressure is built up in the

accumulators and release the parking brake. The display then
disappears. The display can be removed with the function key .
4.11.2.15 Event menu parking brake
Event menu parking brake, description

• The parking brake is activated and you try to engage a gear.
• The parking brake is activated and you try to activate the automatic
functions that require the parking brake to be released.
Release the parking brake and the display disappears. The display can
be removed with the function key .
014990

4.11.2.16 Event menu low AdBlue level
Event menu low AdBlue level, description

• The level in the AdBlue tank is low.
If the figure is shown, top up the AdBlue. The display then disappears.
NOTE
014991
4.11.2.17 Event menu low fuel level
Event menu low fuel level, description

• The level in the fuel tank is low.
If the figure is shown, top up the fuel. The display then disappears. The
For machines with Volvo TAD871VE:

014992
NOTE
4.11.2.18 Event menu no operator in seat
Event menu no operator in seat, description

The figure is shown with:
• Attempt to engage a gear without anyone sitting in the driver's
seat. The transmission then goes to neutral and the gear must be
engaged again once the operator sits in the seat again.
• The working hydraulics are activated without anyone sitting in the
driver's seat.
014994
4.11.2.19 Event menu open door
Event menu open door, description

• A function is limited because the door(s) is/are not closed.
In the event that the display is shown, close the door(s). The display
then disappears. The display can be removed with the function key .
015206

4.11.2.20 Event menu automatic spreading 20'–40'
Event menu automatic spreading 20'–40', description

• Automatic spreading of attachment 20' to 40' in progress. To stop
an ongoing automatic 20' to 40' spreading, activate spreading in or
out of with the control lever. The display then disappears.
4.11.2.21 Event menu tilt lock
Event menu tilt lock, description
With tilt lock it is not advisable to operate the machine at a speed faster
than 5 km/h. This is because it results in increased wear. Therefore,
the control and monitoring system limits the machine's speed.

• Machine speed is limited due to the tilt lock function being active.
In case the figure is shown:

• Reduce speed to below 5 km/h.
• Disengage the lock function, the speed limitation and display are
then discontinued. The lock function is handled by the control
lever, see Control lever (53), page 58 and Functions of control
lever, Cobra (53), page 60.
4.11.2.22 Event menu rotation stop
Event menu rotation stop, description

• Rotation of attachment reaches permitted rotation limit ±25° from
straight position when the rotation stop function is active.
If the figure is shown turn the attachment toward straight position. The
display then disappears. The function can be bypassed, see Rotation
stop, page 205.

4.11.2.23 Event menu contact

Event menu contact top-lift attachment, description
• One to three corners of the attachment are in contact with the load
during contact. The lift corners which are in contact are filled in.
I.e. when the twistlock ends up in open or closed position.
When all four corners are in contact the display figure disappears
and the load can be locked.
In the event that the image is shown, operate the attachment until full
contact is achieved. Load cannot be secured (lock twistlocks) before
full contact. The load can be locked when all four corner points have
contact. The display then disappears.
4.11.2.24 Event menu twistlocks

Event menu twistlocks, description
• The sensors for twistlocks cannot detect if twistlocks are in locked
or unlocked position. Figure is shown during lift.
When all sensors have contact, the display figure disappears.
If the figure is shown, set down any load immediately and:

• Operate attachment until full contact is obtained and twistlocks are
in correct position. The display then disappears.
• Open and lock twistlocks (use switch for by-pass of safety system
(position 47) if necessary). The display then disappears.
4.11.2.25 Event menu low washer fluid level

Event menu low washer fluid level, description
• The level in the washer fluid reservoir is low.
If the figure is shown, top up the washer fluid. The display then
disappears. The display can be removed with the function key .
015205
4.11.2.26 Event menu air filter air conditioning system

Event menu air filter air conditioning system,
description
• The air filter in the air-conditioning system is clogged.
If the figure is shown, replace the air filter. The display then disappears.
015442

4.11.2.27 Event menu arm rest
Event menu arm rest, description
The image is shown if the left-hand arm rest is not in lowered position
on activation of mini wheel/joystick control.
In the event that the image is shown, lower the arm rest and try again
to activate mini-wheel/joystick control. This clears the display. The
016610
4.11.2.28 Event menu seat belt
Event menu seat belt, description

• The belt is not fastened and the speed exceeds 3 km/h
If the figure is shown, fasten the seat belt. The display then disappears.
4.11.2.29 Event menu release the parking brake
Event menu release the parking brake, description

• Attempt to release the parking brake is made without the service
brake pedal being pressed down.
014995
4.11.2.30 Event menu preheating
Event menu preheating, description

• Preheating is activated.
The engine's control system activates the preheating during a time
period as necessary.
The event menu disappears when preheating is complete. The display

can be removed with the function key .
014997

4.11.2.31 Event menu raise/lower cab temperature
Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description

• The cab temperature is raised or lowered. Desired temperature is
displayed in the menu.
The event menu disappears a short time after the most recent
temperature change with the cab temperature switches. The display
4.11.2.32 Event menu raise/lower fan speed
Event menu raise/lower fan speed, description

• The fan speed is raised or lowered.
The event menu disappears a short time after the last fan change
with the switches for fan speed. The display can be removed with the
function key .
014999
4.11.2.33 Event menu start interlock
Event menu start interlock, description

• The start interlock (Immobiliser) function prevents the operator
from staring the engine, e.g. with the alcolock.
• Engine or hydraulic oil heater is engaged.
The event menu disappears when the conditions for starting the
machine are met. The display can be removed with the function key .
015200
4.11.2.34 Event menu heating rear view mirrors/rear

windscreen
Event menu heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen,

description

• Heating in rear window is activated.
• Heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen activated.
The event menu disappears a short time after activation. The display
015201


• Heating in rear window is deactivated.
• Heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen deactivated.
The event menu disappears a short time after the function is

deactivated. The display can be removed with the function key .
015202
4.11.2.35 Event menu service
Event menu service, description

• Time to next service is approaching. The remaining time to service
in hours is shown in the menu.
Ensure that the machine is serviced according to the prescribed

intervals. The display can be removed with the function key .
4.11.2.36 Event menu control breaker
Event menu control breaker, description

• The control breaker is pressed in when specific functions are
activated.
• The control breaker is activated.
Reset the control breaker by turning it clockwise. The display can be

015444
4.11.2.37 Event menu intermittent wiper
Event menu intermittent wiper, description

• Slow intermittent wipers are activated.

015445


• Fast intermittent wipers are activated.
015446
4.11.2.38 Event menu speed limitation
Event menu speed limitation, description

• Functions in the machine are prevented because the speed is too
high.
If the figure is shown, reduce speed. The display then disappears.
4.11.2.39 Event menu battery charging
Event menu battery charging, description

• The engine's alternator does not charge the battery for a few
seconds.
If the figure is shown, increase the engine speed in order to increase

alternator output. The display disappears after 2 seconds when the
alternator is charging the battery. If the display does not disappear,
release the load safely, park the machine and contact service.
4.11.2.40 Event menu low coolant level engine
Event menu low coolant level engine, description

• The coolant level in the engine's expansion tank becomes too low.
If the figure is shown, release the load safely, park the machine and
check the coolant level, see Cooling system, general, page 236.

4.11.2.41 Event menu load centre
Event menu load centre, description

• Lift or extension functions are active; the menu is a means for
preventing unpermitted load cases during load handling.
The bar shows how much of the machine's capacity (in percent) is
being used for the current load and load centre distance. Yellow field
means 80–90% and red field means 90–100%.
Use the information to position the load in a way that minimises loading.
4.11.2.42 Event menu automatic stop function
Event menu automatic stop function, description

The image is shown before:
• The engine is stopped by automatic engine shutdown, see
Automatic stop function, page 179.
• The engine is stopped by the automatic start and stop function, see
Automatic start and stop function, page 180.
The bar indicates remaining time until shutdown as a % of set time for
automatic shutdown.
4.11.2.43 Event menu automatic start function
Event menu automatic start function, description

• The engine is ready to be started automatically by the automatic
start/stop function, see Automatic start and stop function, page 180.
To start the engine, activate any hydraulic function, depress the

accelerator pedal or depress the brake pedal.
017365
4.11.2.44 Event menu operator identification
Event menu operator identification, description

• No tag for operator identification has been read.
The display disappears when operator identification is complete. The


4.11.2.45 Event menu speed limitation, load position
Event menu speed limitation, load position,

description

• The speed is limited depending on the position of the load.
Which of the arrows is shown on the figure depends on the cause of

the speed limitation.
The display disappears when the load has been lowered or the boom
has been retracted. The display can be removed with the function
key .
4.11.2.46 Event menu speed limitation, warm-up mode
Event menu speed limitation, warm-up mode,

description
• The engine speed is limited in warm-up mode.
The display figure disappears when the engine has reached the correct
operating temperature. The display can be removed with the function
key .
4.11.2.47 Event menu, boom in incorrect position
Event menu, boom in incorrect position, description

• The boom is in an incorrect position.
The display disappears when the boom is raised. The display can be
4.11.2.48 Event menu, cab in incorrect position
Event menu, cab in incorrect position, description

• The cab is tilted and the function activated is not permitted with
tilted cab.
The display disappears when the cab is lowered. The display can be

92 4 Instruments and controls – Optional equipment
4.12 Optional equipment

Back-up camera and distance warning
General
As an option, the machine can be equipped with back-up camera.

There are two different systems with back-up camera.
• Back-up camera.
• Back-up camera with distance warning.
Back-up camera
The back-up camera is fitted in a recess in the counterweight and the

image is shown on a monitor in the cab.
The monitor is fitted on a hinged bracket to the right, in front of the door
in the cab. The back-up camera has a microphone, the audio is played
back using a loudspeaker in the monitor. Volume is adjusted using
the Right and Left buttons on the monitor (position A). The monitor
brightness is adapted automatically to the light in the cab by the light
sensor (position F). Lines are shown over the camera image that help
to judge the distance to the object in the picture.
Monitor back-up camera The monitor can also be mounted on the left-hand side, in front of the
door .
A. Right / Left (volume)
B. Up / Down The machine can be equipped with several cameras. Selection of
camera display is made via the Confirm selection button on the monitor
C. Off / On (position D), the back-up camera is automatically selected when
D. Confirm selection (change camera) reverse gear is activated.
E. Show menu
More settings are available via the monitor's built-in menu system that
F. Light sensor is shown with the Show menu button (position E). To navigate in the
menus, use the arrow keys (position A and B) and the button Confirm
selection (position D).

4 Instruments and controls – Back-up camera and distance warning 93
Back-up camera with distance warning
The back-up camera with distance warning uses the camera to show
the area behind the machine and ultrasonic sensors to warn of objects
in the area behind the machine. The distance warning system is only
active when reverse gear is selected.
The back-up camera is fitted in a recess in the counterweight and the

image is shown on a monitor in the cab.
The monitor is fitted on a hinged bracket to the right, in front of the

door in the cab. The camera has a microphone, the audio is played
back using a loudspeaker in the monitor. The monitor has four
programmable shortcut buttons (position D), the function of the buttons
can be set using the menu system in the monitor.
The sensors for distance warning are located on each side of the rear
A. Screen display off / on
counterweight. When objects are detected by the sensors the operator
B. Indicator light, power is warned by coloured bars on the right-hand side of the monitor as well
C. Light sensor as by acoustic warnings (see below).
D. Shortcuts 1 - 4 The monitor can also be mounted on the left-hand side, in front of the
E. Cancel door .
F. Menu navigation The machine can be equipped with several cameras. Selection of
G. Confirm selection camera display is made via the Confirm selection button on the monitor
(position D), the back-up camera is automatically selected when
reverse gear is activated.
More settings are available via the monitor's built-in menu system that
is shown when the Menu navigation button (position F) is pressed up
or down. To navigate in the menus, use the Menu navigation button
(position F) and confirm a selection by pressing the Confirm selection
button (position G), undo a selection or exit the menus by pressing the
Cancel button (position E).

94 4 Instruments and controls – Fire extinguishing system
Distance warning
Distance warning
Back-up camera with distance warning works in the same way as

the normal back-up camera but with the addition that it also warns of
objects behind the machine.
NOTE
The distance warning system should be seen as an aid when
driving at low speed. Always have a clear view of the area behind
the machine; personnel or other vehicles may enter the area behind
the machine.
Distance warning takes place in four stages with audio and visual
indication on the monitor.
A. Distance warning stage 1 and 2

Stage 1
• No objects within 3 metres behind the machine.
B. Distance warning stage 3
• Green constant indicator to the right of the monitor (position A).
C. Distance warning stage 4
D. Distance warning stage 4 Stage 2
• Object within 3.0 - 1.7 metres behind the machine.
• Yellow flashing indicator to the right of the monitor (position A) and
warning sound twice per second.
Stage 3
• Object within 1.7 - 0.7 metres behind the machine.
• Red flashing indicator to the right of the monitor (position B) and
warning sound, four times per second.
Stage 4
• Object within 0.7 metres behind the machine or at the sides.
• Red constant indicator to the right of the monitor (position C), stop
symbol above image and constant warning sound.
Fire extinguishing system

General
As an option, the machine can be equipped with a fire extinguishing

system, see Emergency equipment, page 97.
This system is permanently mounted with both a manual and an

automatic trigger and a display.
For more information, contact the supplier of the system.

4 Instruments and controls – Vehicle Data Interface (VDI) 95
Vehicle Data Interface (VDI)

General
As an option, the machine can be prepared for connecting external

systems for reading operating data from the machine (e.g.Insight).
On machines with VDI there is an extra connector (X039), the 9-pin

Universal mate-n-lock type, in the electronic box in the cab. The
connector contains the following connections:
1. CAN bus option (R+)
2. CAN bus option (R-)
3. Ignition voltage, 24 V 10 A
4. Battery voltage, 24 V 10 A
5. Ground
6. Not connected
7. Not connected
8. Not connected
9. Battery voltage before battery disconnector, 24 V 10 A (may
require extra installation on the machine)
For more information, contact Cargotec.
Insight
General
Operator identification
Insight is an option for process automation. Insight reads operational

data from the machine through VDI. The information is sent wirelessly
to a en central server for further processing and display on a website at
the customer. For more information, contact Cargotec.
Operator identification
As an option for Insight, the machine can be equipped with driver
identification. Operator identification uses identification tags and a tag
reader at the rear of the cab by the door.
Using operator identification, operator-dependent functions can be

selected in Insight, such as start interlock and speed limitation, for
example. For more information, contact Cargotec
Tag and tag reader for driver identification

96 5 Handling
5 Handling
General
The machine is intended to be used in the way that is described in
the operator's manual. If the machine is used in any other way or in
potentially dangerous environments, e.g. an explosive environment,
then special safety rules must be followed and the machine must be
equipped for such an environment.
NOTE
It is the operator who is responsible for ensuring that the machine
comes in for service according to prescribed service intervals.
Procedures are described in the maintenance manual.
The information in the chapter for handling the machine does not
relieve the operator of the responsibility of following laws or other
national regulations for road safety and work safety.
Awareness, alertness, good judgement and respect for governing

safety regulations are prerequisites for avoiding accident risks.
Environmental impact
It is important that the machine is used in a way that results in minimal
environmental impact with regards to fuel consumption, exhausts, and
noise emissions. Therefore, keep the following in mind:
• Plan the work and optimise machine use.
• Avoid operating with full throttle when transporting.
• Do not rev the engine unnecessarily when load handling.
• Optimise operation with regard to acceleration and braking.
• Minimise the time the machine runs at idling speed. Do not allow
the machine to idle when there is a break in the work.

5 Handling – Handling 97
Emergency equipment
The following emergency equipment is available on the machine:
• Emergency exit from cab, right-hand door.
In an emergency:
1. Open the emergency exit right-hand door with handle on
inside.
34 • Control breaker for load handling.

In an emergency:
1. Press down the control breaker for hydraulics (position 34)
immediately.
All load handling functions stop and the transmission is set
in neutral position.
2. Restore control breaker (turn clockwise).
• Fire extinguisher
Located within easy reach!
012702
• Display fire extinguishing system

If the fire extinguishing system fails to trigger automatically in
the event of fire, depress the switch for manual triggering (a) to
activate the fire extinguishing system.
a Switch for manual triggering.
b Warning lamp, fire.
c Warning lamp, fault in trigger coil.
d Warning lamp, fault in detector coil.
e Indicator light, manual mode.
f Indicator light, fire monitoring active.
If the indicator light is extinguished, this means there is a fault
in the voltage feed to the fire extinguishing system.
g Alarm test and reset.
• External activation control, fire extinguishing system

Visible external position on the chassis!
If the fire extinguishing system fails to trigger automatically in the
event of fire, depress the control to activate the fire extinguishing
system.

98 5 Handling – Running-in
5.1 Running-in
General
The machine should be operated with great care during the running-in
period. The intention is to considerably increase the service life of
the machine.
Recommended running-in period is 10 hours of operating time. This

results in fewer malfunctions.
Engine
The oil and filter must be changed according to intervals described in
the maintenance manual.
Transmission
The oil and filter must be changed according to intervals described in
the maintenance manual.
Tyres and rims

For a new machine it is extremely important that the wheel nuts
are check-tightened during the first week of operation until they are
properly set in. This should be done at intervals of 4-5 operating
hours (up to approx. 40-50 operating hours). Then the wheel nuts are
check-tightened according to intervals described in the maintenance
manual.

5 Handling – Daily inspection 99
5.2 Daily inspection

General
Daily inspection of the machine is extremely important in order to
ensure that it is safe both for the operator and its surroundings.
Every operator should perform checks before a new work shift. In this
way, operators can avoid running defective machines with malfunctions
that have been generated or caused during an earlier work shift.
WARNING
Never use a machine without first performing the daily
inspection.
Risk of personal injury and property damage!
For work instructions, see 6.1 Daily inspection, page
222. Report to the foreman/supervisor if defects are
found on the machine during daily inspection!
For work instructions, see 6.1 Daily inspection, page 222.

100 5 Handling – Error codes
5.3 Error codes

Error codes, general
Error codes indicate that there is a defect on the machine. Errors are
d indicated by an Indicator light for active errors (position 18) on the
a steering wheel panel. The number of active errors is totalled on the
display (position a-c). Some error codes are displayed via pop-up
e menus to attract the operator's attention. The error codes should be
b used by operators and service technicians to identify faults and to
implement suitable action.
c In case of an error code indication, it's very important to identify the

error code and to perform an action to correct the problem.
015223 All error code information for active and inactive error codes is collected
a. Number of active error codes with error code on the operating menu Customer settings and the sub-menus Active
level stop. Errors (position d) and Error history (position e).
b. Number of active error codes with error code Select Active Errors or Error history with or and press to
level warning. activate the desired menu.
c. Number of active error codes with error code
level information.
d. Menu for active error codes, Active errors.
e. Menu for inactive error codes, Error history.
Error code information via pop-up menu
Error code information via pop-up menu

Error codes are automatically shown via pop-up menus on the display.
Some information about the error code can be read out directly by
the symbols in the pop-up menu. The menus Active errors and Error
history show detailed information about the error codes.
Press to show specific detailed information via the Active errors

menu.
Press to confirm the error and the display returns to show the menu
that was active before the pop-up men was activated. If there are more
015224
active errors, the next pop-up menu is shown.
Example figure
Error code information Active errors
Error code information Active errors

Detailed information about the error codes are presented under Active
errors where, among others, the error code level, action with error code
and the device that generated the error code are presented.
For information about how the error code should be interpreted, see
Field d: Error code number, page 107.
Scroll through active error codes with and . Leave the error code
list by pressing the function key .
015225
Example figure Active errors

5 Handling – Error codes 101
Error code information in Error history
Error code information in Error history

Detailed information about the last 50 inactive error codes is presented
under Error history where, amongst other things, the error code level,
the unit that generated the error code and the date and time are
presented.
For information about how the error code should be interpreted, see
Field d: Error code number, page 107.
Scroll through inactive error codes with and . Leave the error code
list by pressing the function key .
014945
Example figure Error history
Action in the event of error code
CAUTION
STOP indicates a malfunction in the machine which
may affect the safety of the operator and others in the
vicinity or may cause a breakdown. Read the error
code. Switch off the engine and perform action in
accordance with the error code table.
WARNING and INFORMATION alarms indicate
malfunctions of such character that work does not
have to be stopped immediately. The capacity of the
machine may be reduced and specific functions may
stop working. - Perform the measures according to the
error code table immediately.
1 Errors are indicated through the pop-up menus, and by an indicator

light for active errors (position 18) being lit.
Stop the machine and let the engine run at idle speed.
2 Identify error code level, see Field a: Error code level, page 104.
NOTE
If several error codes come from the engine or transmission, the
error code level is shown for the most serious error code.
015224
3 Note all error codes. For explanation, see Display figure for error
code information, page 104.
4 Perform the action depending on the action symbol shown in the
Example figure
middle field, see Field b: Operator action, page 104.
5 Check: Start the engine and check under Active errors that the
error code has disappeared.

102 5 Handling – Error code indication
5.3.1 Error code indication

General
Error codes are indicated with an activated indicator light for active
error codes (position 18) and a pop-up menu. The error codes are
divided into three error code levels depending on their severity.
The error code levels are shown as follows:

a b c d • STOP is indicated by:
1. Lit indicator light for active fault codes (position 18).
2. STOP symbol in the pop-up menu.
3. Red border around the pop-up menu.
• WARNING indicated by:
2. Warning triangle in the pop-up menu.
3. Yellow border around the pop-up menu.
• INFORMATION indicated by.
2. Information symbol in the pop-up menu.
3. Grey border around the pop-up menu.
015226
a Symbol for the error code level

STOP, WARNING or INFORMATION
b Symbol for action
c Symbol for component
d Border indicates error code level
Red = STOP
Yellow = WARNING
Grey = INFORMATION

5 Handling – Error code information on display 103
5.3.2 Error code information on display

Error code display
Error code information is shown with display figures in two ways:
• Automatically in display.
The error code is confirmed by . When the error code is
confirmed the display returns to the previous selected menu. If the
error code is active then it is stored in the error code list under the
operating menu Active errors.
If the error code remains active, the figure returns in the display
within 3-5 minutes. Level STOP error codes are shown five times,
WARNING three times and INFORMATION once or not at all.
014954
Example of automatic figure in display
• In error code list Active errors.

Active error codes are stored in the error code list. Navigate to
the operating menu Customer settings with or , select Active
errors and confirm with . Navigate the error code list with the
function keys and . Leave the error code list by pressing the
function key .
NOTE
If error code isn't included in the error code list, it may be due to
015225
the following:
– condition for error detection no longer exists, e.g., control
Example of the error code list Active errors
lever is released or engine is off.
– loose connection/poor contact.

104 5 Handling – Error code information on display
Display figure for error code information

The menus are divided into fields where the information is displayed.
• Field a: Error code level. Shown with a symbol.
• Field b: Operator action. Shown with a symbol.
• Field c: Component that generated the error code. Shown with
a b c a symbol.
• Field d: Error code.
• Field e: Number of errors. For Error history the number of errors
is limited to the last 50 errors.
015228
• Field f: Number of errors on each error code level.
h
• Field g: Date and time.
Pop-up menu for error codes • Field h: Number of unconfirmed pop-up menus.
Field a: Error code level

e
f The control and monitoring system gives error code information in three
d levels which are indicated with a symbol in the display unit.
Symbol Action
a b c STOP
Indicates a serious malfunction that may jeopardise
the operator's safety or cause machine failure. The
015229
error code must be attended to immediately.
WARNING
Active error codes shown in Active errors
Indicates malfunction in machine that should be
taken care of as soon as possible.
e
f
d INFORMATION
a g c
Information to the operator that something should
be rectified, e.g. broken bulb. Rectify the cause
at a suitable opportunity. Instructions for action
are normally found in chapter 6 Inspection and
maintenance.
015230
Field b: Operator action

The control system provides information about what action the operator
Inactive error codes are shown in Error history
should carry out. The information is indicated with a symbol on the
display unit.
Symbol Action
Carry out action according to the daily inspection,
see Instructions, page 222.
Error requires action by trained personnel.

One of the functions of the machine is not working
fully.
Critical error.
Errors that may jeopardise the machine or safety,
such as low oil pressure or overload. Stop the
machine and safeguard the error.
Read the operator's manual.

Field c: Affected function

For an explanation of the display fields, see Display figure for error
Symbol Function Symbol Function Symbol Function

Engine Fuel level AdBlue level
Temperature electric Temperature electric Particulate filters

motor hydraulics motor drive
After-treatment system Exhaust temperature Air filter
Engine coolant level Coolant temperature Engine oil level

engine
Preheating engine Transmission Oil temperature torque

converter
Lock-up, torque converter Differential locks Transmission oil level
Oil pressure, transmission Transmission oil Power transmission

temperature
Tyre pressure Regulator (inverter) Brakes
Brake pressure Parking brake Oil temperature brake

system
Steering Suspension Load handling
Control levers Lift/lower Lift/lower
Extension Side shift Side shift
Spreading (positioning) Spreading (positioning) Rotation
Tilt Tilt lock Tilt

Symbol Function Symbol Function Symbol Function

Levelling Levelling lock Levelling
Contact twistlocks Locked twistlocks Unlocked twistlocks
Contact top lift attachment Contact side-lift Bottom lift attachment

attachment
Support jacks Control system Boom angle
Boom length Scales Overload system
Overload system Height limit Frame, body, cab and

accessories
Hour meter (operating Seat Revolving driver's seat

hours)
Air conditioning ECH, ECC Fresh air filter
Pause heater Temperature water heater Recirculation
Washer fluid Wipers Revolving or flashing

beacon
Lighting Horn Heating rear

windscreen/rear view
mirrors
Cab sliding length Vertically adjustable cab Tiltable cab
Central lubrication Hydraulic oil filter Hydraulic oil temperature
Battery charging CAN bus CAN bus drivetrain

Field d: Error code number
Field d: Error code number

The control system gives error codes from the machine's sub-systems:
1 2 3
Node (AAA)
The first part of the error code specifies the control unit (Node) that
generated the error. The following control units can generate error
codes:
Node Control unit
015233
1–99 Control units in the RedCAN system
100 Engine
Example figure error codes
110 Transmission Dana
1. Node (control unit) (AAA)
210 Exhaust system
2. SPN (component) (BCCCC-DD)
3. FMI (type of error) (E) Type (B)
Type is indicated with a letter before the digits in the component
number, which specifies the type of component concerned.
The following component types are used:
Type Component type

A Unit
B Sensor
D Control unit
E White light
F Fuse
G Battery or alternator
H Signal unit for audio or light
K Relay
M Electric motor
P Meter
R Resistor, potentiometer
S Switch, contact
X Connector
Y Solenoid valve
SPN (CCCC)
SPN is a unique number (component number) to locate the faulty
component.

Location (DD)
In the cases where several components have the same component
number, there is a number for location that makes the error code
unique, either a serial number (1 – 9) or a number equivalent to a
position (10 – 220).
The following locations are used:
Location Explanation (abbreviation)

10 Left (LE)
20 Right (RI)
30 Upper (UP)
40 Lower (LO)
100 Front (LE)
110 Left front (LF)
120 Right front (RF)
200 Rear (RE)
210 Left rear (LR)
220 Right rear (RR)
FMI (EE)
FMI indicates type of error.
The following error types are used:
Table Specifications FMI
FMI Description SAE text

0 Value too high. Data valid, but higher than normal operating range.
1 Value too low. Data valid, but lower than normal operating range.
2 Incorrect data. Intermittent or incorrect data.
3 Electrical problem. Abnormally high voltage or short-circuit to higher voltage.
4 Electrical problem. Abnormally low voltage or short-circuit to lower voltage.
5 Electrical problem. Abnormally low current or open circuit.
6 Electrical problem. Abnormally high current or short-circuit to ground.
7 Mechanical problem. Incorrect response from mechanical system.
8 Mechanical problem or electrical Abnormal frequency.
problem.
9 Communication error. Abnormal update rate.
10 Mechanical problem or electrical Abnormally wide variations.
problem.
11 Unknown malfunction. Non-identifiable malfunction.
12 Component error. Incorrect unit or component.
13 Incorrect calibration. Values outside calibration values.
14 Unknown malfunction. Special instructions.
15 Value too high. Data valid but higher than normal operating range: The least serious
level.
16 Value too high. Data valid but higher than normal operating range: Moderately
serious level.
17 Value too low. Data valid but under normal operating range: The least serious level.

FMI Description SAE text

18 Value too low. Data valid but under normal operating range: Moderately serious
level.
19 Communication error. Received network data incorrect.
20 Data too high. Data valid but higher than normal value.
21 Data too low. Data valid but lower than normal value.
22-30 Reserved for SAE allocation.
31 FMI not available or the condition Not available or the condition exists.
indicated by SPN exists.
32 Electrical problem. Abnormally high resistance or short-circuit to higher voltage.
33 Electrical problem. Abnormally low resistance or short-circuit to lower voltage.
34 Time exceeded. Time exceeded.
35 Communication error. CAN bus error.
36 Communication error. Driver error.
37 Communication error. Over flow.
38 Communication error. Error passive stat.
39 Communication error. Baud rate.
40 Communication error. Control unit disappears (stop sending messages) after start up.
41 Communication error. Control unit missing on start up.
42 Communication error. CAN-bus segment after the control unit is faulty. Normal side.
43 Communication error. CAN-bus segment after the control unit is faulty. RedCAN side.
44 Communication error. Control unit incorrectly positioned RedCAN circuit.
45 Communication error. Checksum error in the control unit.
Field e: Number of error codes

Specifies the number of menu pages with active fault codes in Active
errors and the number of menu pages with inactive error codes Error
history.
Field f: Number of errors on each error code level

Specifies the number of active error codes on each error code level.
Field g: Date and time

Specifies the date and time when the error code was confirmed.
Field h: Number of unconfirmed pop-up menus

Specifies the number of unconfirmed pop-up menus.

110 5 Handling – Error code tables
5.3.3 Error code tables

Error codes machine
Error codes for the machine are sorted in numerical order. The table
contains the following information:
• Type - Denotes the type of component, see Type (B), page 107.
• SPN - Denotes the component concerned, see SPN (CCCC),
page 107.
• FMI - Denotes the type of error, see FMI (EE), page 108.
• Node - Denotes which unit has generated the error, see Node
(AAA), page 107.
• Location - denotes the component's location in the machine,
Location (DD), page 108.
• Description - Indicates description of the error code as well as any
limitation that can occur in the machine in case of the error code
in question.
• Action - Indicates STOP/WARNING/INFORMATION for action
according to error code level, with or without detailed information.
If the error code number isn't included in the error code table, contact
service.
Table Error codes machine
Type SPN FMI Node Location Description Action

114 1 1 Overcurrent will cause BMS STOP
to switch off and open the
contactor.
The battery is switched off after
timeout and error code.
114 2 1 Fault in current sensor, battery INFORMATION
cell.
114 6 1 The current is above the WARNING
configured alarm level for a
configured time.
168 3 1 Warning of overvoltage. INFORMATION
168 3 1 Cell voltage is above configured WARNING
alarm level 4.0V.
H 1037 6 11 2 Indicator light, levelling lock, in WARNING
control lever.
S 1310 7 11 Travel direction selector, logical STOP
error.
S 1500 31 1 0 No ignition at speeds above 3 WARNING
km/h.
Switch off and restart the
machine to reset the error code.
H 1753 6 1 2 Indicator light wide twistlocks INFORMATION
(WTP), outer position.
H 1753 6 7 1 Indicator light wide twistlocks INFORMATION
(WTP), outer position.
1800 0 1 Battery temperature is above INFORMATION
configured warning level 55 °C.
Allow the battery to cool down.
1800 0 1 Battery temperature is above WARNING
configured alarm level 65 °C.
Allow the battery to cool down.

5 Handling – Error code tables 111
Table Error codes machine (continued)

1800 1 1 Battery temperature is below INFORMATION
configured warning level -6 °C.
Warm up the battery by driving
or park the machine in a warm
building.
1800 1 1 Battery temperature is below WARNING
configured alarm level -11 °C.
Warm up the battery by driving
or park the machine in a warm
building.
1800 1 1 Temperature in battery too low STOP
and BMS contactor open.
The battery is switched off after
timeout and error code.
Park the machine in a warm
building.
1800 2 1 The temperature sensor in INFORMATION
the battery module registers
temperature above 250 °C or
lower than -100 °C.
B 2070 3 2 Contact differential lock, WARNING
position signal.
B 2190 2 1 Sensor, cab filter. INFORMATION
B 2460 2 1 Low pressure, air conditioning. WARNING
K 3150 6 1 Relay, ignition, grounded STOP
circuit.
K 3312 6 2 Driving forward relay, signal STOP
status.
K 3312 6 1 Driving forward relay, signal INFORMATION
status.
K 3312 6 2 Driving forward relay, signal INFORMATION
status.
K 3320 6 2 Driving reverse relay, signal STOP
status.
K 3320 6 1 Driving reverse relay, signal INFORMATION
status.
K 3320 6 2 Driving reverse relay, signal INFORMATION
status.
3509 2 1 Voltage sensor battery cell INFORMATION
detects an incorrect voltage
due to poor connection of the
sensor's cables.
Contact Cargotec support.
K 3600 6 2 Relay, starter motor. WARNING
Only engine option Cummins.
E 4000 5 2 10 Low beam, left. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4000 5 3 210 Low beam left rear, at turnable INFORMATION
operator's station. Check the
lamp.


E 4000 6 2 10 Low beam, left. INFORMATION
E 4000 6 3 210 Low beam left rear, at turnable INFORMATION
operator's station.
E 4000 5 2 20 Low beam, right. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4000 5 3 220 Low beam right rear, at turnable INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4000 6 2 20 Low beam, right. INFORMATION
E 4000 6 3 220 Low beam right rear, at turnable INFORMATION
operator's station.
E 4020 5 2 10 High beam, left. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4020 5 3 210 High beam left rear, at turnable INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4020 6 2 10 High beam, left. INFORMATION
E 4020 6 3 210 High beam left rear, at turnable INFORMATION
operator's station.
E 4020 5 2 20 High beam, right. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4020 5 3 220 High beam right rear, at INFORMATION
turnable operator's station.
Check the lamp.
E 4020 6 2 20 High beam, right. INFORMATION
E 4041 5 2 1 Extra work lights, frame left. INFORMATION
Check the lamp.
E 4041 6 2 1 Extra work lights, frame left. INFORMATION
Check the lamp.
E 4041 5 2 2 Extra work lights, frame right. INFORMATION
Check the lamp.
E 4041 6 2 2 Extra work lights, frame right. INFORMATION
Check the lamp.
E 4042 5 1 10 Extra work lights, cab left. INFORMATION
Check the lamp.
E 4042 6 1 10 Extra work lights, cab left. INFORMATION
E 4042 5 1 20 Extra work lights, cab right. INFORMATION
Check the lamp.
E 4042 6 1 20 Extra work lights, cab right. INFORMATION
E 4042 5 1 1 Extra work lights left. Check INFORMATION
the lamp.
E 4042 6 1 1 Extra work lights left. INFORMATION
E 4042 5 1 2 Extra work lights right. Check INFORMATION
the lamp.
E 4042 6 1 2 Extra work lights right. INFORMATION
E 4043 5 2 10 Work lights boom left. Check INFORMATION
the lamp.
E 4043 6 2 10 Work lights boom left. Check INFORMATION
the lamp.


E 4043 5 2 20 Work lights boom right. Check INFORMATION
the lamp.
E 4043 6 2 20 Work lights boom right. Check INFORMATION
the lamp.
E 4044 5 7 10 Work lights, attachment left. WARNING
Check the lamp.
E 4044 6 7 10 Work lights, attachment left. WARNING
E 4044 5 7 110 Extra work lights, attachment WARNING
left. Check the lamp.
left.
E 4044 5 7 20 Work lights, attachment right. WARNING
Check the lamp.
E 4044 6 7 20 Work lights, attachment right. WARNING
right. Check the lamp.
right.
E 4045 5 6 110 Extra work lights, attachment lift WARNING
leg left front. Check the lamp.
lift leg left front.
leg right front. Check the lamp.
lift leg right front.
lift leg left rear. Check the lamp.
lift leg left rear.
leg right rear. Check the lamp.
lift leg right rear.
E 4050 5 1 10 Work lights, backward left. WARNING
Check the lamp.
E 4050 6 1 10 Work lights, backward left. WARNING
Check the lamp.
E 4050 5 1 20 Work lights, backward right. WARNING
Check the lamp.
E 4050 6 1 20 Work lights, backward right. WARNING
Check the lamp.
E 4050 6 2 Work lights, steering. Check INFORMATION
the lamp.
H 4110 6 2 Brake light. INFORMATION
H 4110 6 3 100 Brake lights front, at turnable INFORMATION
operator's station.
H 4120 6 2 1 Tail lights. INFORMATION


H 4120 6 3 100 Tail lights front, at turnable INFORMATION
operator's station.
H 4160 6 2 Position light. INFORMATION
H 4220 6 2 10 Direction indicators left. INFORMATION
H 4220 6 2 20 Direction indicators right. INFORMATION
H 4281 6 2 Revolving beacon, frame WARNING
H 4282 6 1 Revolving beacon, cab. WARNING
H 4284 6 7 Revolving beacon, attachment. WARNING
E 4340 6 1 Interior lighting. WARNING
H 5001 6 7 30 Indicator light, overheight legs WARNING
up.
H 5004 6 7 Indicator light, scale position WARNING
load receipt,
H 5620 6 1 2 Indicator light, unlocked WARNING
twistlocks (roof panel cab).
H 5620 6 7 1 Indicator light, unlocked WARNING
twistlocks
H 5630 6 1 2 Indicator light, locked twistlocks WARNING
(roof panel cab).
H 5630 6 7 1 Indicator light, locked WARNING
twistlocks.
H 5640 6 1 2 Indicator light, contact (roof WARNING
panel cab).
H 5640 6 7 1 Indicator light, contact WARNING
twistlocks.
H 5640 6 7 30 Indicator light, contact upper WARNING
container.
H 5640 6 7 40 Indicator light, contact lower WARNING
container.
H 5720 6 7 Indicator light, height limitation. WARNING
H 5740 6 1 Indicator light, support jacks WARNING
down (roof panel cab).
H 5760 6 6 110 Indicator light, contact lift leg WARNING
left front.
right front.
left rear.
right rear.
H 5780 6 6 100 Indicator light, lift legs clamping WARNING
position front.
H 5780 6 6 200 Indicator light, lift legs clamping WARNING
position rear.
H 5800 6 6 30 Indicator light, lift legs front up. WARNING
H 5800 6 6 40 Indicator light, lift legs front WARNING
down.


5981 1 1 Warning of critical state of INFORMATION
charge, SoC.
5981 2 1 State of charge, SoC does not INFORMATION
correspond.
5981 4 1 Cell voltage is below configured WARNING
alarm level 2.3V.
Charge the battery.
5983 12 1 Control unit BMS cannot INFORMATION
communicate with at least one
battery cell at the moment.
Contact Cargotec support.
H 5991 6 1 Indicator light, buckled seat WARNING
belt.
H 5992 6 1 Indicator light, Mini steering WARNING
wheel/joystick control.
H 5993 6 11 3 Indicator light, tilt lock, control WARNING
lever.
Y 6002 5 2 Servo valve, load signal WARNING
attachment.
Y 6003 5 2 Solenoid valve, engagement of WARNING
hydraulic top lift.
Y 6003 6 2 Solenoid valve, engagement of WARNING
hydraulic top lift.
Y 6004 5 2 Solenoid valve lower. WARNING
Y 6004 6 2 Solenoid valve lower. WARNING
Y 6004 5 2 2 Solenoid valve lower 2. WARNING
Y 6004 6 2 2 Solenoid valve lower 2. WARNING
Y 6005 5 2 Solenoid valve lift. WARNING
Y 6005 6 2 Solenoid valve lift. WARNING
Y 6005 5 2 2 Solenoid valve lift 2. WARNING
Y 6005 6 2 2 Solenoid valve lift 2. WARNING
Y 6006 5 2 Solenoid valve, boom out. WARNING
Y 6006 6 2 Solenoid valve, boom out. WARNING
Y 6007 5 2 Solenoid valve, boom in. WARNING
Y 6007 6 2 Solenoid valve, boom in. WARNING
Y 6008 5 2 Rotation clockwise. WARNING
Y 6008 6 2 Rotation clockwise. WARNING
Y 6008 5 7 Solenoid valve, rotation WARNING
clockwise.
clockwise.
Y 6009 5 2 Rotation anticlockwise. WARNING
Y 6009 6 2 Rotation anticlockwise. WARNING
anticlockwise.


anticlockwise.
Y 6010 5 2 Solenoid valve tilt out. WARNING
Y 6010 6 2 Solenoid valve tilt out. WARNING
Y 6010 5 7 Solenoid valve tilt out WARNING
Y 6010 6 7 Solenoid valve tilt out WARNING
Y 6011 5 2 Solenoid valve tilt in. WARNING
Y 6011 6 2 Solenoid valve tilt in. WARNING
Y 6011 5 7 Solenoid valve tilt in WARNING
Y 6011 6 7 Solenoid valve tilt in WARNING
Y 6012 5 7 1 Solenoid valve tilt lock. WARNING
Y 6014 5 2 Solenoid valve differential lock. WARNING
Y 6014 6 2 Solenoid valve differential lock. WARNING
Y 6016 5 2 Solenoid valve, cab sliding out WARNING
(forward/up).
Y 6016 6 2 Solenoid valve, cab sliding out WARNING
(forward/up).
Y 6016 5 3 Cab sliding up. WARNING
Y 6016 6 3 Cab sliding up. WARNING
Y 6017 5 2 Solenoid valve, cab sliding in WARNING
(backward/lower).
Y 6017 6 2 Solenoid valve, cab sliding in WARNING
(backward/lower).
Y 6017 5 3 Cab sliding lower. WARNING
Y 6017 6 3 Cab sliding lower. WARNING
Y 6018 5 2 Solenoid valve spreading out. WARNING
Y 6018 5 2 10 Solenoid valve spreading out WARNING
left fork.
left fork.
right fork.
right fork.
Solenoid valve function lifting
tool, tool changer open/out.
left.


right.
right.
right.
Y 6019 5 2 Solenoid valve spreading in. WARNING
Y 6019 5 2 10 Solenoid valve spreading in left WARNING
fork.
Y 6019 6 2 10 Solenoid valve spreading in left WARNING
fork.
Y 6019 5 2 20 Solenoid valve spreading in WARNING
right fork.
right fork.
Alternative solenoid valve
function lifting tool, tool changer
close/in.
Alternative solenoid valve
function lifting tool, tool changer
close/in.
Y 6019 5 7 10 Solenoid valve spreading in left. WARNING
Y 6019 6 7 10 Solenoid valve spreading in left. WARNING
right.
right.
Y 6020 5 2 Solenoid valve side shift left. WARNING
Y 6021 5 2 Solenoid valve side shift right. WARNING
Y 6022 5 2 Solenoid valve extra hydraulic WARNING
function out.
function out.
Y 6022 5 7 Open container door. WARNING
Y 6022 6 7 Open container door. WARNING
function in.


function in.
Y 6023 5 7 Close container door. WARNING
Y 6023 6 7 Close container door. WARNING
Y 6034 5 7 1 Solenoid valve levelling lock. WARNING
Y 6035 5 2 Solenoid valve levelling right WARNING
up/anticlockwise.
Y 6035 6 2 Solenoid valve levelling right WARNING
up/anticlockwise.
Y 6035 5 7 Solenoid valve levelling WARNING
anticlockwise.
Y 6035 6 7 Solenoid valve levelling WARNING
anticlockwise.
Y 6036 5 2 Solenoid valve levelling left WARNING
up/clockwise.
up/clockwise.
up/clockwise.
up/clockwise.
Y 6039 5 7 Solenoid valve open twistlocks. WARNING
Y 6039 6 7 Solenoid valve open twistlocks. WARNING
Y 6040 5 7 Solenoid valve lock twistlocks. WARNING
Y 6040 6 7 Solenoid valve lock twistlocks. WARNING
Y 6045 5 2 10 Solenoid valve, blocking lower WARNING
left.
left.
right.
right.
Y 6046 5 7 1 Twistlocks out to WTP position. STOP
Y 6046 6 7 1 Twistlocks out to WTP position. STOP
Y 6046 5 7 2 Twistlocks in to standard STOP
position.
Y 6046 6 7 2 Twistlocks in to standard STOP
position.
Y 6047 5 2 Solenoid valve, cab tilt up. WARNING
Y 6047 6 2 Solenoid valve, cab tilt up. WARNING
Y 6048 5 2 Solenoid valve, cab tilt down. WARNING
Y 6048 6 2 Solenoid valve, cab tilt down. WARNING


Y 6050 5 2 Solenoid valve, blocking boom WARNING
in.
Y 6050 6 2 Solenoid valve, blocking boom WARNING
in.
Y 6051 5 2 1 Solenoid valve, regeneration WARNING
boom out.
Y 6051 6 2 1 Solenoid valve, regeneration WARNING
boom out.
Y 6051 5 2 10 Solenoid valve, regeneration lift WARNING
left.
left.
right.
right.
Y 6053 5 6 10 Solenoid valve, operating WARNING
position left.
position left.
position right.
position right.
Y 6054 5 2 Clamp close not working. WARNING
Y 6054 6 2 Clamp close not working. WARNING
Y 6054 5 2 10 Clamp close left not working. WARNING
Y 6054 6 2 10 Clamp close left not working. WARNING
Y 6054 5 2 20 Clamp close right not working. WARNING
Y 6054 5 3 10 Clamp close not working. WARNING
Y 6054 6 3 10 Clamp close not working. WARNING
Y 6054 5 6 10 Solenoid valve clamp close left. WARNING
Y 6054 6 6 10 Solenoid valve clamp close left. WARNING
Y 6054 5 6 20 Solenoid valve clamp close WARNING
right.
Y 6054 6 6 20 Solenoid valve clamp close WARNING
right.
Y 6054 6 7 Solenoid valve clamp close WARNING
ELME.
Y 6055 5 2 Clamp open not working. WARNING
Y 6055 6 2 Clamp open not working. WARNING
Y 6055 5 2 10 Clamp open left not working. WARNING
Y 6055 6 2 10 Clamp open left not working. WARNING


Y 6055 5 2 20 Clamp open right not working. WARNING
Y 6055 5 3 10 Clamp open not working. WARNING
Y 6055 6 3 10 Clamp open not working. WARNING
Y 6055 5 6 10 Solenoid valve clamp release WARNING
left.
left.
right.
right.
Y 6055 6 7 Solenoid valve clamp release WARNING
ELME.
Y 6056 5 6 110 Solenoid valve knee in left front. WARNING
Y 6056 6 6 110 Solenoid valve knee in left front. WARNING
Y 6056 5 6 120 Solenoid valve knee in right WARNING
front.
front.
Y 6056 5 6 210 Solenoid valve knee in left rear. WARNING
Y 6056 6 6 210 Solenoid valve knee in left rear. WARNING
rear.
rear.
Y 6057 5 6 110 Solenoid valve knee out left WARNING
front.
front.
Y 6057 5 6 120 Solenoid valve knee out right WARNING
front.
front.
rear.
rear.
rear.
rear.
Y 6058 5 6 110 Solenoid valve leg up left front. WARNING
Y 6058 6 6 110 Solenoid valve leg up left front. WARNING


Y 6058 5 6 120 Solenoid valve leg up right WARNING
front.
Y 6058 6 6 120 Solenoid valve leg up right WARNING
front.
Y 6058 5 6 210 Solenoid valve leg up left rear. WARNING
Y 6058 6 6 210 Solenoid valve leg up left rear. WARNING
Y 6058 6 7 100 Solenoid valve leg up front WARNING
ELME.
Y 6058 6 7 200 Solenoid valve leg up rear WARNING
ELME.
Y 6058 5 7 220 Solenoid valve leg up right rear. WARNING
Y 6058 6 7 220 Solenoid valve leg up right rear. WARNING
Y 6059 5 6 110 Solenoid valve leg down left WARNING
front.
front.
Y 6059 5 6 120 Solenoid valve leg down right WARNING
front.
front.
rear.
rear.
Y 6059 6 7 100 Solenoid valve leg down front WARNING
ELME.
Y 6059 6 7 200 Solenoid valve leg down rear WARNING
ELME.
rear.
rear.
Y 6062 5 2 Solenoid valve, disengagement WARNING
hydraulic oil pump 2.
hydraulic oil pump 2.
Y 6063 5 3 Solenoid valve support jacks WARNING
up.
up.
down.
down.
Y 6065 5 7 Solenoid valve, disengage WARNING
rotation.
Y 6065 6 7 Solenoid valve, disengage WARNING
rotation.


Y 6070 5 7 Solenoid valve overheight legs WARNING
up.
up.
down.
down.
Y 6072 5 3 1 Solenoid valve clamping WARNING
pressure.
pressure.
pressure.
pressure.
Y 6078 5 3 1 Solenoid valve, paper WARNING
attachment closing upper
clamping arm.
clamping arm.
clamping arm.
clamping arm.
Y 6080 5 2 Solenoid valve activation cab WARNING
movement.
Y 6080 6 2 Solenoid valve activation cab WARNING
movement.
Y 6085 5 2 Solenoid valve share hydraulic WARNING
function 1.
function 1.
Y 6085 5 7 Select door opener. WARNING
Y 6085 6 7 Select door opener. WARNING
function 2.
function 2.
Y 6088 5 2 Solenoid valve accumulator WARNING
shut off.
Y 6088 6 2 Solenoid valve accumulator WARNING
shut off.
Y 6089 5 2 Solenoid valve, activate extra WARNING
hydraulic oil pump lift.
Y 6089 6 2 Solenoid valve, activate extra WARNING
hydraulic oil pump lift.


Y 6091 5 2 Solenoid valve fan speed WARNING
engine cooling fan.
Y 6091 6 2 Solenoid valve fan speed WARNING
engine cooling fan.
Y 6092 5 2 Solenoid valve fan speed INFORMATION
direction, engine cooling fan.
Y 6092 6 2 Solenoid valve fan speed INFORMATION
direction, engine cooling fan.
Y 6093 5 2 Solenoid valve, pump WARNING
unloading boom in.
Y 6093 6 2 Solenoid valve, pump WARNING
unloading boom in.
hydraulic pump attachment.
hydraulic pump attachment.
Y 6095 5 2 Solenoid valve split function WARNING
mast.
Y 6095 6 2 Solenoid valve split function WARNING
mast.
Y 6100 5 7 Wide body in. WARNING
Y 6100 6 7 Wide body in. WARNING
Y 6101 5 7 Wide body out. WARNING
Y 6101 6 7 Wide body out. WARNING
Y 6104 6 7 Solenoid valve beam lock WARNING
locked.
Y 6105 6 7 Solenoid valve beam lock WARNING
unlocked.
Y 6120 5 1 1 Damper motor, recirculation. INFORMATION
Y 6150 5 2 1 Voltage feed to electronic STOP
control module for joystick
control/mini steering wheel.
Y 6150 6 2 1 Voltage feed to electric control STOP
module for joystick control/mini
steering wheel.
Y 6150 6 2 2 Voltage feed to electric control STOP
module for joystick control/mini
steering wheel.
Y 6150 2 2 3 Electric control module for STOP
joystick control/mini steering
wheel.
Y 6150 31 2 Control unit control valve STOP
feedback seat position and
Control unit mini-wheel or
joystick control (Y6150) are
missing.


Y 6301 5 3 210 Solenoid valve drive left rear WARNING
wheel forward (Y6301-LE),
open circuit.
4WD is disengaged.
wheel forward (Y6301-LE),
short circuit to ground.
4WD is disengaged.
Y 6301 5 3 220 Solenoid valve drive right rear WARNING
wheel forward (Y6301-RI),
open circuit.
4WD is disengaged.
wheel forward (Y6301-RI),
short circuit to ground
4WD is disengaged.
wheel backward (Y6311-LE),
open circuit.
4WD is disengaged.
wheel backward (Y6311-LE),
4WD is disengaged.
wheel backward (Y6311-RI),
open circuit
4WD is disengaged.
wheel backward (Y6311-RI),
4WD is disengaged.
Y 6360 5 3 100 Directional control valve STOP
steering, forward. At revolving
driver's seat.
steering, forward. At revolving
driver's seat.
steering, backward. At
revolving driver's seat.
steering, backward. At
revolving driver's seat.
Y 6420 2 2 Solenoid valve parking brake. STOP
Y 6450 5 2 Electromagnetic clutch cooling INFORMATION
compressor.


Y 6450 6 2 Electromagnetic clutch cooling INFORMATION
compressor.
K 6501 6 1 10 Windscreen wiper left, relay. INFORMATION
K 6501 6 1 20 Windscreen wiper right, relay. INFORMATION
M 6501 7 1 10 Windscreen wiper left, position INFORMATION
signal.
M 6501 7 1 20 Windscreen wiper right, position INFORMATION
signal.
M 6502 5 1 Rear windscreen wipers. INFORMATION
M 6502 6 1 Rear windscreen wipers. INFORMATION
M 6502 7 1 Wiper rear window, position INFORMATION
signal.
M 6503 5 1 Combined wipers, windscreen INFORMATION
and roof window, position
signal.
Wiper roof window, position
signal.
signal.
signal.
signal.
signal.
M 6511 6 1 Washing, front windscreen. INFORMATION
M 6512 5 1 Washing, rear windscreen. INFORMATION
M 6512 6 1 Washing, rear windscreen. INFORMATION
M 6513 5 1 Washing, combined wipers, INFORMATION
windscreen and roof window.
Motor washing, roof window.
M 6513 6 1 Washing, combined wipers, INFORMATION
windscreen and roof window.
Motor washing, roof window.
M 6570 5 1 Cabin fan. INFORMATION
M 6570 6 1 Cabin fan. INFORMATION
M 6570 7 1 10 Cooling fan, transmission. WARNING
M 6570 7 1 20 Cooling fan, transmission. WARNING
M 6580 6 2 Electromagnetic clutch, engine WARNING
cooling fan.
M 6580 7 2 Electromagnetic clutch, engine WARNING
cooling fan.
M 6590 6 2 Cooling fan, intercooler. WARNING
M 6590 7 2 10 Cooling fan, intercooler. WARNING
M 6590 7 2 20 Cooling fan, intercooler. WARNING


M 6670 5 1 Circulation pump pause heater. INFORMATION
M 6670 6 1 Circulation pump pause heater. INFORMATION
M 6680 5 2 Cooling fan, hydraulic oil cooler. WARNING
M 6680 6 2 Cooling fan, hydraulic oil cooler. WARNING
Y 6720 3 1 Damper motor air distribution, INFORMATION
position signal.
Y 6720 4 1 Damper motor air distribution, INFORMATION
position signal.
Y 6720 5 1 1 Damper motor air distribution. INFORMATION
Y 6730 3 1 Heating valve, position signal. INFORMATION
Y 6730 4 1 Heating valve, position signal. INFORMATION
Y 6730 5 1 1 Heating valve. INFORMATION
M 6740 5 2 Cooling fan, oil cooler brake WARNING
system.
M 6740 6 2 Cooling fan, oil cooler brake WARNING
system.
M 6750 5 3 20 Motor, revolving driver's seat. WARNING
Y 6760 5 1 Solenoid valve, swivel driver's WARNING
seat.
Y 6760 6 1 Solenoid valve, swivel driver's WARNING
seat.
Y 6760 5 3 20 Solenoid valve, brake revolving WARNING
driver's seat.
driver's seat.
driver's seat.
driver's seat.
Y 6820 5 2 Extension out. WARNING
Y 6820 6 2 Extension out. WARNING
Y 6821 5 2 Extension in. WARNING
Y 6821 6 2 Extension in. WARNING


Y 6840 5 3 Solenoid valve torque control, WARNING
hydrostatic transmission
(Y6840), open circuit.
4WD is disengaged.
Y 6840 6 3 Solenoid valve torque control, WARNING
(Y6840), short circuit to ground.
4WD is disengaged.
Y 6841 5 3 Solenoid valve drain hydrostatic WARNING
transmission (Y6841), open
circuit.
4WD is disengaged.
Y 6841 6 3 Solenoid valve drain hydrostatic WARNING
transmission (Y6841), short
circuit to ground.
4WD is disengaged.
Y 6842 5 3 Solenoid valve back pressure WARNING
(Y6842), open circuit.
4WD is disengaged.
Y 6842 6 3 Solenoid valve back pressure WARNING
(Y6842), short circuit to ground.
4WD is disengaged.
R 6900 3 11 1 Accelerator pedal, signal A. WARNING
R 6900 3 11 2 Accelerator pedal, signal B. WARNING
R 6900 3 11 3 Accelerator pedal 2, signal A. WARNING
R 6900 3 11 4 Accelerator pedal 2, signal B. WARNING
R 6900 2 11 40 Accelerator. STOP
M 6930 5 2 1 Pump central lubrication frame. INFORMATION
M 6930 6 2 1 Pump central lubrication frame. INFORMATION
M 6930 5 7 2 Pump central lubrication INFORMATION
attachment.
M 6930 6 7 2 Pump central lubrication INFORMATION
attachment.
B 6941 3 11 Engine right dashboard panel INFORMATION
forward/backward position
signal.


signal.
signal.
M 6941 5 11 1 Engine right dashboard panel INFORMATION
forward/backward.
forward/backward.
forward/backward.
forward/backward.
up/down position signal.
up/down.
up/down.
up/down.
up/down.
B 6943 3 11 Engine steering wheel panel INFORMATION
M 6943 5 11 1 Engine steering wheel panel INFORMATION
up/down.
up/down.
up/down.
up/down.
P 7080 14 1 Operating hours do not WARNING
correspond to reference Control
3 unit frame KFU (D7971).
6
7
11
12


D 7090 31 1 Control unit BMS is missing. STOP
Speed limitation
B 7202 2 7 Sensor, contact jammed. WARNING
Check that the indicator pin is
not binding and that the sensor
is clean.
B 7205 3 7 10 Sensor, twistlocks. WARNING
B 7205 7 7 10 Sensor, twistlocks locked and WARNING
open simultaneously.
Check that the sensor is clean.
B 7205 7 7 20 Sensor, twistlocks locked and WARNING
open simultaneously
Check that the sensor is clean.
B 7216 2 7 Sensor, float position lifting WARNING
head.
B 7226 3 2 1 Sensor hydraulic pressure, lift WARNING
cylinder piston side left.
B 7226 3 2 2 Sensor, hydraulic pressure, lift WARNING
cylinder piston side right.
cylinder piston side right.
cylinder rod side left.


cylinder rod side left.
cylinder rod side right.
cylinder rod side right.
B 7228 3 2 Height sensor, lift. WARNING
B 7229 3 2 Sensor, tilt angle. WARNING
B 7230 3 7 Sensor, damping attachment. INFORMATION
B 7230 4 7 Sensor, damping attachment. INFORMATION
B 7235 3 2 10 Sensor, power cell left. WARNING
B 7235 3 2 20 Sensor, power cell right. WARNING
B 7235 3 7 110 Sensor, load attachment, left STOP
front.
front.
B 7235 3 7 120 Sensor, load attachment, right STOP
front.
front.
rear.
rear.
rear.
rear.
B 7236 3 2 Sensor, power cell tilt. WARNING
B 7236 4 2 Sensor, power cell tilt. WARNING
B 7237 2 7 Sensor, upper container has WARNING
jammed.
is clean.
B 7238 3 2 Sensor, pressure tilt cylinder. WARNING
B 7238 4 2 Sensor, pressure tilt cylinder. WARNING


B 7241 3 2 Sensor boom angle. WARNING
B 7242 7 2 Central lubrication frame. INFORMATION
B 7242 7 7 Central lubrication attachment. INFORMATION
B 7243 3 2 Sensor, electronic dipstick WARNING
engine oil.
B 7243 4 2 Sensor, electronic dipstick WARNING
engine oil.
B 7244 3 2 Electric dipstick transmission WARNING
sensor.
B 7244 4 2 Electric dipstick transmission WARNING
sensor.
B 7245 3 2 10 WARNING
B 7245 4 2 10 WARNING
B 7245 3 2 20 Sensor, feedback steering, WARNING
channel 2.
B 7245 4 2 20 Sensor, feedback steering, WARNING
channel 2.
B 7252 3 11 Ambient light intensity sensor. WARNING
B 7252 4 11 Ambient light intensity sensor. WARNING
B 7253 3 7 Tilt or levelling angle WARNING
attachment.
B 7253 4 7 Tilt or levelling angle WARNING
attachment.
B 7254 3 1 Sensor, cab position. WARNING
B 7254 4 1 Sensor, cab position. WARNING
B 7255 3 1 Sensor, tilt angle, cab. WARNING
B 7255 4 1 Sensor, tilt angle, cab. WARNING
B 7258 2 7 Sensor, lock wedge position WARNING
locked has jammed.
is clean.
B 7570 3 2 Sensor fuel level. INFORMATION
B 7570 4 2 Sensor fuel level. INFORMATION
B 7572 3 2 Sensor back pressure, exhaust WARNING
system.
system.
system.
system.
B 7600 0 2 0 Speed sensor. WARNING
B 7600 8 2 0 Speed sensor. WARNING


B 7601 8 3 210 Speed sensor left rear wheel WARNING
(B7601-LE).
B 7601 8 3 220 Speed sensor right rear wheel WARNING
(B7601-RI).
B 7680 3 3 1 Sensor, clamping pressure WARNING
single/left clamp.
single/left clamp.
single/left clamp.
single/left clamp.
B 7680 3 3 3 Sensor, clamping pressure right WARNING
clamp.
clamp.
clamp.
clamp.
B 7680 3 7 10 Sensor, function lifting tool, tool WARNING
changer left.
changer left.
changer right.
changer right.
B 7681 3 2 Brake pressure sensor. WARNING
B 7681 4 2 Brake pressure sensor. WARNING
B 7682 3 2 Sensor parking brake WARNING
B 7683 3 2 Accumulator pressure sensor. WARNING
B 7683 4 2 Accumulator pressure sensor. WARNING
B 7686 3 2 Sensor, boom length. WARNING
B 7688 3 7 LS-pressure attachment WARNING
(K-motion).
B 7688 4 7 LS-pressure attachment WARNING
(K-motion).
B 7701 2 3 Revolving driver's seat, STOP
incorrect or no feedback.
B 7720 0 2 High temperature oil brake STOP
system.
B 7720 32 2 Sensor, oil temperature brake WARNING
system.


B 7720 33 2 Sensor, oil temperature brake WARNING
system.
B 7740 32 1 Ambient temperature sensor. INFORMATION
B 7740 33 1 Ambient temperature sensor. INFORMATION
B 7751 32 1 Inner temperature sensor. INFORMATION
B 7751 33 1 Inner temperature sensor. INFORMATION
B 7752 32 1 Fan temperature sensor. INFORMATION
B 7752 33 1 Fan temperature sensor. INFORMATION
B 7753 32 1 Temperature display sensor. INFORMATION
B 7753 33 1 Temperature display sensor. INFORMATION
B 7755 1 2 Water heater, air conditioning INFORMATION
water level low.
B 7760 32 2 Hydraulic oil temperature WARNING
sensor.
B 7760 33 2 Hydraulic oil temperature WARNING
sensor.
B 7770 3 3 Turnable operator's station, STOP
position operator's station.
B 7770 4 3 Turnable operator's station, STOP
position operator's station.
B 7770 2 3 Turnable operator's station, no STOP
change of angle when turning
is requested.
B 7770 3 7 Position sensor side shift. STOP
B 7770 4 7 Position sensor side shift. STOP
D 7801 31 2 20 Motor regulator propulsion right STOP
is missing (D7801).
D 7802 31 2 10 Motor regulator propulsion left STOP
is missing (D7802).
D 7811 31 2 Motor regulator pump load STOP
handling and steering is
missing (D7811).
D 7812 31 2 Motor regulator pump brake STOP
system and A/C is missing
(D7812).
A 7870 2 2 Sensor fault, overload system. STOP
D 7901 31 12 Control unit missing. STOP
D 7930 31 2 1 Control unit missing. STOP


A 7991 31 1 Control unit missing. STOP
E 8020 5 2 Electrically-heated rear view INFORMATION
mirror.
E 8020 6 2 Electrically-heated rear view INFORMATION
mirror.
E 8050 11 2 Water heater, air conditioning INFORMATION
not working.
R 8070 3 11 1 Control lever lift/lower. WARNING
R 8070 4 11 1 Control lever lift/lower. WARNING
R 8070 3 11 2 Control lever, boom out/in and WARNING
levelling.
R 8070 4 11 2 Control lever, boom out/in and WARNING
levelling.
R 8070 3 11 3 WARNING
R 8070 4 11 3 WARNING
R 8070 3 11 4 WARNING
R 8070 4 11 4 WARNING
R 8070 3 11 5 Control lever 5th function. WARNING
R 8092 3 11 1 Brake position A. WARNING
R 8092 3 11 2 Brake position B. WARNING
M 8100 5 1 Condenser roof. INFORMATION
M 8100 6 1 Condenser roof. INFORMATION
R 8250 3 1 1 Potentiometer joystick STOP
control/mini-wheel, channel 1.
R 8250 4 1 1 Potentiometer joystick STOP
control/mini-wheel, channel 1.
R 8250 3 1 2 Potentiometer mini-steering STOP
wheel, channel 2.
R 8250 4 1 2 Potentiometer mini-steering STOP
wheel, channel 2.
H 8500 6 1 Horn. WARNING
K 8881 6 1 Relay rear windscreen heating. INFORMATION
D 9001 31 1 VDI. WARNING
H 9003 5 7 Buzzer automatic spreading WARNING
20'–40'.


H 9003 6 7 Buzzer automatic spreading WARNING
20'–40'.
D 9130 13 2 Tyre pressure monitoring INFORMATION
system.
D 9130 14 2 1 Sensor, tyre pressure, left front INFORMATION
outer wheel.
D 9130 14 2 2 Sensor, tyre pressure, left front INFORMATION
inner wheel.
D 9130 14 2 3 Sensor, tyre pressure, right INFORMATION
front inner wheel.
front outer wheel.
rear.
D 9130 14 2 6 Sensor, tyre pressure, left rear. INFORMATION
D 9130 31 2 Tyre pressure monitoring WARNING
system.
A 9150 31 1 Kalmar MTU (Machine WARNING
Telematic Unit).
A 9170 11 1 External scales. WARNING
A 9170 31 1 External scales. WARNING
A 9170 2 1 100 External scales, scales unit WARNING
attachment.
attachment.
attachment.
A 9630 5 2 Fire extinguishing system. WARNING
A 9630 6 2 Fire extinguishing system. WARNING
H 9650 6 2 1 Reverse alarm. WARNING
H 9650 6 3 2 Reverse alarm front, at WARNING
revolving driver's seat
10001 54 1 System error. INFORMATION
10002 14 1 Configuration number does STOP
not correspond for Control unit
KCU (D7901).
10002 14 2 Configuration number does not STOP
correspond for Control unit KFU
(D7971).
KFU-2 (D7972).
KAU-2 (D7912).


KAU (D7911).
KPU (D7902).
10002 14 12 Configuration number does not STOP
correspond for Control unit KID
(D7950).
10002 14 99 Configuration number in STOP
a control unit does not
correspond, but Control unit
KCU (D7901) does not know
which control unit contains the
error.
10003 14 1 Program version does not WARNING
correspond for Control unit
KCU (D7901).
correspond for Control unit KFU
(D7971).
KFU-2 (D7972).
KAU-2 (D7912).
KAU (D7911).
KPU (D7902).
correspond for Control unit KID
(D7950).
10004 14 1 No Setup file for Control unit STOP
KCU (D7901).
KFU (D7971).
KFU-2 (D7972).
KAU-2 (D7912).
KAU (D7911).
KPU (D7902).
KID (D7950).
10005 14 1 1 No drivetrain parameter file, STOP
Control unit KCU (D7901).
Control unit KCU KFU (D7971).


10005 14 2 2 No load sensor parameter file, STOP
10005 14 2 3 No fuel tank parameter file, STOP
10005 14 2 4 No central lubrication STOP
parameter file, Control unit
KFU (D7971).
10005 14 2 5 No front tyre parameter file, STOP
Control unit KFU (D7971).
10005 14 2 6 No overload system (OLS) STOP
parameter file, Control unit KFU
(D7971).
10005 14 2 7 No parameter file Eco Drive STOP
Mode, Control unit KFU
(D7971).
Control unit KFU-2 (D7972).
10005 14 7 4 No parameter file central STOP
lubrication attachment, Control
unit KAU (D7911).
Control unit KPU (D7902).
10005 14 11 7 No control lever parameter file, STOP
Control unit KID (D7950).
10101 3 1 Battery voltage Control unit WARNING
KCU (D7901).
10101 4 1 Battery voltage Control unit STOP
KCU (D7901). Check the fuses.
10102 3 1 Ignition voltage Control unit WARNING
KCU (D7901).
10102 4 1 Ignition voltage Control unit STOP
KCU (D7901). Check the fuses.
10102 4 1 1 Ignition voltage Control unit WARNING
KEM (A7991). Check the fuses.
KFU (D7971).
KFU (D7971). Check the fuses.
10102 6 2 2 Ignition voltage Control unit WARNING
engine (D7940).
KFU-2 (D7972).
KFU-2 (D7972). Check the
fuses.
KAU-2 (D7912).
KAU-2 (D7912). Check the
fuses.


KAU (D7911).
KAU (D7911). Check the fuses.
10102 4 7 1 Ignition voltage Control unit STOP
KEM-2 (A7992). Check the
fuses.
10102 4 7 2 Ignition voltage Control unit STOP
KEM-3 (A7993). Check the
fuses.
KPU (D7902).
KPU (D7902). Check the fuses.
10102 3 12 Ignition voltage Control unit KID WARNING
(D7950).
10102 4 12 Ignition voltage Control unit KID STOP
(D7950). Check the fuses.
10103 6 1 Redundant voltage feed Control STOP
unit KCU (D7901).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KPU (D7902).
unit KID (D7950).
unit KID (D7950).
10104 3 1 5V reference voltage Control WARNING
unit KCU (D7901).
unit KCU (D7901).
10104 3 1 1 5V reference voltage Control STOP
unit KEM (A7991).
unit KEM (A7991).


unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KEM-2 (A7992).
unit KEM-3 (A7993).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KEM-2 (A7992).
unit KEM-3 (A7993).
unit KPU (D7902).
unit KPU (D7902).
10104 3 11 1 5V voltage feed to steering WARNING
wheel panel.
10104 4 11 1 5V voltage feed to steering WARNING
wheel panel.
10104 6 11 2 Background lighting, steering WARNING
wheel panel.
10104 6 11 3 Function lighting, steering WARNING
wheel panel.
unit KID (D7950).
unit KID (D7950).
10105 2 2 1 Reference ground Control unit WARNING
KFU (D7971).
KFU (D7971).
KFU (D7971).
KFU (D7971).
KFU-2 (D7972).


KFU-2 (D7972).
KFU-2 (D7972).
KFU-2 (D7972).
10105 2 6 Reference ground Control unit WARNING
KAU-2 (D7912) indicator lights.
10105 6 6 Reference ground Control unit WARNING
KAU-2 (D7912) indicator lights.
KAU-2 (D7912).
KAU-2 (D7912).
KAU-2 (D7912).
KAU-2 (D7912).
KAU-2 (D7912).
KAU-2 (D7912).
KAU (D7911).
KAU (D7911).
KAU (D7911).
KAU (D7911).
KAU (D7911).
KAU (D7911).
10105 5 7 2 Reference ground Control unit STOP
KEM-3 (A7993).
10105 6 7 2 Reference ground Control unit STOP
KEM-3 (A7993).
10106 6 1 24V voltage feed left-hand STOP
arm rest (mini steering
wheel/joystick control).
10106 6 2 1 24V voltage feed sensor frame. WARNING
10106 6 2 2 24 V voltage feed sensor frame. WARNING
10106 6 6 LF 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, WARNING
front left.
10106 6 6 RF 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, WARNING
front right.
10106 6 6 LR 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, WARNING
rear left.


10106 6 6 RR 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, WARNING
rear right.
10106 6 7 2 24V voltage feed sensor WTP. STOP
10106 6 7 10 24V voltage feed sensor WARNING
attachment, left.
attachment, right.
attachment, ELME.
10106 6 11 1 24V voltage feed switch cab. WARNING
10106 6 11 2 24V voltage feed switch cab. WARNING
10106 6 11 3 24V voltage feed components WARNING
cab.
10106 6 11 4 24V voltage feed control WARNING
breaker.
10107 6 11 1 Guide lights dashboard panel. WARNING
10201 35 1 RedCAN, CAN error. STOP
10201 40 12 CAN bus, control unit STOP
disappeared after start-up,
10201 41 12 CAN bus, control unit not found STOP
at start-up, Control unit KID
(D7950).
10201 42 1 CAN bus, segment error normal WARNING
side, Control unit KID (D7950).
10201 43 1 CAN bus, segment error WARNING
RedCAN side, Control unit KID
(D7950).
(D7950).


(D7950).
(D7950).
(D7950).
(D7950).
(D7950).
10201 44 12 CAN bus, control unit STOP
misplaced, Control unit KID
(D7950).
10202 31 2 CAN bus drivetrain STOP
communication error.
10202 35 2 CAN bus drivetrain open circuit. STOP
10204 35 1 CAN bus option cab, open STOP
circuit.
10204 36 1 CAN bus option cab, STOP
10301 2 1 Non-volatile memory Control STOP
unit KCU (D7901).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KPU (D7902).
unit KID (D7950).
10302 2 1 Application log Control unit STOP
KCU (D7901).


KFU (D7971).
KFU-2 (D7972).
KAU-2 (D7912).
KAU (D7911).
KPU (D7902).
10302 2 12 Application log Control unit KID STOP
(D7950).
10303 0 1 High temperature circuit board, STOP
Control unit KAU-2 (D7912).
Control unit KAU (D7911).
10304 2 1 Processing time for software in STOP
10305 6 1 High power consumption WARNING
Control unit KAU-2 (D7912).
Control unit KAU (D7911).


10306 3 2 1 Control breaker voltage Control WARNING
unit KFU (D7971).
10306 4 2 1 Control breaker voltage Control STOP
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KAU (D7911).
10307 2 1 Memory error Control unit KCU STOP
(D7901).


10307 2 2 Memory error Control unit KFU STOP
(D7971).
10307 2 3 Memory error Control unit STOP
KFU-2 (D7972).
KAU-2 (D7912).
10307 2 7 Memory error Control unit KAU STOP
(D7911).
10307 2 11 Memory error Control unit KPU STOP
(D7902).
10307 2 12 Memory error Control unit KID STOP
(D7950).
(D7901).
(D7971).
KFU-2 (D7972).
KAU-2 (D7912).
(D7911).
(D7902).
(D7950).
(D7901).
(D7971).
KFU-2 (D7972).
KAU-2 (D7912).
(D7911).
(D7902).
(D7950).

Error codes Volvo TAD851VE and TAD871VE

Error codes for the engine are sorted in numerical order. The table
contains the following information:
• SPN - Specifies component, SPN is the error code that is shown in
the machine, in accordance with SAE J1939
• Supplier-code indicates the error code in accordance with the
supplier's specification.
in question.
Table Error codes, engine (engine option Volvo)
SPN FMI Supplier code Description Action

28 2 - + switches. WARNING
29 2 - Accelerator. WARNING
51 3 P02E612 Sensor throttle position. Engine speed WARNING
limited to idling speed.
limited to idling speed. Engine difficult to
start or does not start at all.
91 0 P012085 Accelerator. Speed limitation. WARNING
91 9 P012082 Accelerator. WARNING
91 19 P012083 Accelerator. Speed limitation. WARNING
94 0 P008B97 High fuel pressure. WARNING
94 3 P253912 Fuel pressure sensor. WARNING
94 18 P008A00 Low fuel pressure. Reduced output and WARNING
torque.
97 0 P226985 Water in fuel. WARNING
Drain the fuel pre-filter, see 6.2.2
Fuel system.
97 4 P226411 Sensor, water-in-fuel. WARNING
97 12 P226401 Sensor, water-in-fuel. WARNING

Table Error codes, engine (engine option Volvo) (continued)

98 1 P250F00 Low oil level engine. WARNING
Check the oil level in the engine.
See 6.2.7 Engine oil.
98 4 P250A11 Sensor oil level engine. WARNING
98 5 P250A13 Sensor oil level engine. WARNING
98 18 P108600 Low oil level engine. WARNING
100 1 P052400 Oil pressure too low. Reduced engine WARNING
power or engine is turned off.
100 3 P052012 Oil pressure sensor. STOP
100 5 P052013 Oil pressure sensor. STOP
100 18 P109300 Low oil pressure in engine. Reduced WARNING
engine power or engine is turned off.
102 0 P111800 Boost pressure too high. Reduced STOP
engine power.
102 3 P010512 Sensor, boost pressure. Reduced STOP
engine power.
102 5 P010513 Sensor, boost pressure. Reduced STOP
engine power.
102 16 P111600 High charge-air pressure. STOP
105 0 P111A00 Boost temperature too high. Reduced STOP
engine power.
105 4 P011011 Sensor, boost temperature. STOP
105 5 P011013 Sensor, boost temperature. STOP
105 16 P111900 High boost temperature. STOP
107 0 P10F800 Low pressure between air filter and WARNING
turbo.
107 3 P100712 Sensor air pressure intake. WARNING
107 12 P100701 Pressure sensor air filter. WARNING
108 5 P222613 Sensor air pressure. WARNING
110 0 P021700 Coolant temperature too high. Reduced STOP
engine power.
Check the coolant level. See 6.2.6
Cooling system.
110 4 P011511 Sensor, coolant temperature. Engine STOP
hard to start.


110 5 P011513 Sensor, coolant temperature. Engine STOP
hard to start.
110 16 P111E00 High coolant temperature. STOP
Cooling system.
111 1 P256000 Low coolant level. STOP
Cooling system.
111 3 P255612 Sensor, coolant level. STOP
111 18 P111D00 Low coolant level. STOP
Cooling system.
131 3 P047012 Pressure sensor exhaust gases. Engine WARNING
brake, low performance.
131 5 P047013 Pressure sensor exhaust gases. Engine WARNING
brake, low performance.
131 12 P047001 Pressure sensor exhaust gases. WARNING
157 0 P008800 Fuel pressure, too high. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
157 1 P008700 Fuel pressure, too low. The engine can WARNING
be switched off.
157 4 P019011 Pressure sensor fuel. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
power.
power.
power.
157 14 P00C600 Pressure sensor fuel. The engine turns WARNING
over but does not start.
157 16 P114700 Fuel pressure, high. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
158 2 P05611F Voltage feed Control unit engine WARNING
(D7940). Uneven torque.
158 3 - Voltage feed Control unit engine WARNING
(D7940).
158 4 - Voltage feed Control unit engine WARNING
(D7940).
172 4 P00D911 Ambient temperature sensor. Engine WARNING
difficult to start at low temperatures.
172 5 P00D913 Ambient temperature sensor. Engine WARNING
difficult to start at low temperatures.
173 0 P242800 Exhaust temperature too high. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
173 16 P112E00 High exhaust temperature. WARNING


175 0 P029800 Oil temperature too high. Reduced STOP
engine power.
175 4 P019511 Sensor, oil temperature. Speed STOP
limitation.
175 5 P019513 Sensor, oil temperature. STOP
175 16 P112500 High oil temperature. STOP
190 0 P021900 Engine speed too high. Engine speed WARNING
is limited.
190 16 P119D00 Engine speed too high. WARNING
411 3 P040912 Pressure sensor exhaust gas WARNING
recirculation (EGR).
412 0 P112100 EGR temperature too high. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
412 4 P040A11 Temperature sensor exhaust gas WARNING
412 16 P112200 EGR temperature higher than normal. WARNING
Reduced engine power.
626 2 - Start button WARNING
626 3 P100212 Relay, preheating. Engine difficult to WARNING
start at low temperatures.
628 2 P060741 Memory error in Control unit engine WARNING
(D7940). Engine does not start.
628 2 - Memory error in Control unit engine WARNING
636 7 P001676 Camshaft speed sensor. The engine WARNING
takes longer to start than normal or does
not start at all.
636 8 P034038 Speed sensor camshaft. The engine WARNING
takes longer to start than normal.


636 9 P034031 Speed sensor camshaft. The engine WARNING
637 2 P03351F Crankshaft speed sensor. The engine WARNING
Reduced torque.
637 8 P033538 Crankshaft speed sensor. The engine WARNING
Reduced torque.
637 9 P033531 Crankshaft speed sensor. The engine WARNING
Reduced torque.
639 2 U001088 Control unit engine (D7940), WARNING
communication error CAN bus
drivetrain (J1939).
Engine shut-off: the engine cannot be
started.
Engine running: the engine can only be
stopped by using the emergency stop.
639 2 - Control unit engine (D7940), WARNING
drivetrain (J1939).
started.
639 9 - Control unit engine (D7940), WARNING
drivetrain (J1939).
started.
641 0 P004577 Variable turbo geometry too high value. WARNING
641 2 P256214 Actuator variable turbo geometry. WARNING
641 3 P006E17 Actuator variable turbo geometry. WARNING
641 9 U010C00 Actuator variable turbo geometry. WARNING
641 17 P112B00 Variable turbo geometry temperature WARNING
higher than normal. Reduced engine
power.
647 3 P048012 Electromagnetic clutch cooling fan. WARNING
Cooling fan drive locked at 100%.


Cooling fan drive not working, risk of
overheating.
Cooling fan drive locked at 100%.
651 3 P020112 Injector cylinder 1. The engine has WARNING
reduced power output.
677 3 P061512 Start relay on the starter motor. Engine WARNING
does not start.
does not start.
does not start.
does not start.
679 3 P009012 Fuel pressure regulator (MPROP). WARNING


679 7 P228D72 Fuel pressure regulator (MPROP). WARNING
729 5 P054013 Preheating element. Engine difficult to WARNING
729 7 P05407F Relay, preheating. Engine difficult to WARNING
729 12 P054001 Preheating element. Engine difficult to WARNING
970 3 P100112 Stop-button on engine. The engine is WARNING
switched off and cannot be started.
970 11 P100192 Stop-button on engine. Engine cannot WARNING
be started.
970 14 P100190 Stop-button on engine. Engine cannot WARNING
be started.
1188 3 P024312 Actuator intercooler pressure control. WARNING
1239 14 P009400 Fuel leakage, minor. WARNING
1347 7 P06279C Fuel pressure pump. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
1485 7 P068573 Voltage feed Control unit engine WARNING
(D7940).
1639 3 P052612 Sensor fan speed. The cooling fan does WARNING
not disengage.
1668 2 U008088 Engine control unit (D7940) WARNING
1761 3 P203A12 Level sensor AdBlue tank. WARNING
P203A86
P203A86
1761 17 P114500 AdBlue level, below normal level. WARNING
1761 18 P203F00 AdBlue-level, low. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
2000 9 U010000 Control unit engine (D7940) WARNING
drivetrain (J1939).


2017 9 U014100 Control unit engine (D7940) WARNING
drivetrain (J1939).
2036 9 U117100 Communication error with machine. WARNING
2659 10 P04007C EGR system. WARNING
2659 18 P04009C EGR system, low flow. WARNING
2791 2 P048613 EGR position sensor. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
2791 3 P041A12 EGR unit. Reduced engine power. WARNING
2791 4 P041A11 EGR unit. Reduced engine power. WARNING
2791 5 P040313 EGR unit. Reduced engine power. WARNING
2791 9 U010A00 Communication error between EGR WARNING
unit and Control unit engine (D7940).
2791 11 P040392 EGR valve. Reduced engine power. WARNING
2791 12 P040341 EGR valve. Reduced engine power. WARNING
2791 17 P114E00 EGR valve, temperature higher than WARNING
normal. Reduced engine power.
3031 0 P24FF00 AdBlue-temperature too high. WARNING
3031 4 P205A11 Temperature sensor AdBlue tank. WARNING
P205A01
3216 2 P220064 NOx sensor inlet catalytic converter WARNING
3216 9 U029D00 NOx sensor inlet catalytic converter WARNING
3216 11 P225D00 NOx sensor inlet catalytic converter WARNING
3216 12 P22FB92 NOx sensor inlet catalytic converter WARNING
3216 14 P22001C NOx sensor inlet catalytic converter WARNING
3226 2 P229E64 NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. WARNING
3226 7 P225F00 NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. WARNING
3226 9 U029E00 NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. WARNING
3226 12 P22FE00 NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. WARNING


3226 14 P229E1C NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. WARNING
3241 4 P054411 Sensor exhaust temperature 1. WARNING
3241 12 P054401 Sensor exhaust temperature 1 WARNING
3361 12 P204F93 Metering valve AdBlue. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
3361 12 P208A86 AdBlue pump. Reduced engine power. WARNING
3363 3 P20B112 Heating valve AdBlue tank. Risk that WARNING
AdBlue freezes in the tank.
3364 17 P207F9A Incorrect AdBlue quality. WARNING
3464 3 P02E012 Actuator motor throttle. WARNING
3464 7 P02E09C Actuator motor throttle. WARNING
3464 10 P02E07C Actuator motor throttle. WARNING
3464 12 P02E09B Actuator motor throttle. WARNING
3468 2 P018564 Fuel temperature manifold. WARNING
3468 4 P018511 Fuel temperature sensor. WARNING
3468 16 P016800 Fuel temperature too high. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
3509 3 P06B017 Voltage feed sensor A. WARNING
3509 4 P06B016 Voltage feed sensor A. WARNING
3510 3 P06B317 Voltage feed sensor B. WARNING
3511 3 P06E617 Voltage feed sensor C. WARNING
3511 4 P06E616 Voltage feed sensor C. WARNING
3597 3 P065712 AdBlue pump unit voltage feed A. No WARNING
AdBlue additive.
3597 4 P065711 AdBlue pump unit voltage feed A. No WARNING
AdBlue additive.
3598 3 P266912 AdBlue pump unit voltage feed B. Risk WARNING
that AdBlue freezes.
3598 4 P266911 AdBlue pump unit voltage feed B. Risk WARNING
that AdBlue freezes.


4334 4 P204A11 Pressure sensor AdBlue. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
4334 5 P204A13 Pressure sensor AdBlue. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
4354 3 P20B912 Hose heater A AdBlue. Risk that AdBlue WARNING
freezes in the hose.
4355 3 P20BD12 Hose heater B AdBlue. Risk that AdBlue WARNING
4356 3 P20C112 Hose heater C AdBlue. Risk that AdBlue WARNING
4374 0 P202D7A AdBlue system, pressure leakage. WARNING
4374 1 P208A92 AdBlue pump unit, motor speed too low. WARNING
No AdBlue additive.
4375 0 P10AD12 Motor AdBlue pump unit. WARNING
4375 3 P208A12 Motor AdBlue pump unit. WARNING
4375 14 P21CAA1 Motor AdBlue pump unit. WARNING
4376 3 P20A012 Directional control valve AdBlue pump WARNING
unit. AdBlue is not pumped back to the
tank when the engine is switched off.
4752 7 P245700 EGR cooler, temperature deviation. WARNING
5016 4 P26E711 AdBlue pump unit voltage feed D. WARNING


5392 31 P20E892 AdBlue pressure. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
5394 3 P204712 AdBlue injection unit. No AdBlue WARNING
additive.
additive.
additive.
5394 12 P204786 AdBlue injection unit. WARNING
additive.
5435 14 P204F94 AdBlue system. WARNING
5485 14 P10CE97 AdBlue pump unit, no return flow. WARNING
5765 10 P041A2A EGR temperature sensor. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
520244 3 P009B12 Fuel pressure relief valve. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
engine power.
engine power.
engine power.
520244 12 P018F00 Fuel pressure relief valve. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
520245 0 P016E00 Fuel pressure, too high. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
520245 1 P016F00 Fuel pressure, too low. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
520245 16 P228F00 Fuel pressure above normal level. WARNING
520245 18 P228E00 Fuel pressure below normal level. WARNING
520335 5 U300001 Control unit engine (D7940). Engine WARNING
does not start.
520416 9 U116F00 Communication error Control unit WARNING
after-treatment system (UDS). No
AdBlue additive.
520688 0 P11A600 Exhaust temperature too high. WARNING
520688 3 P11A412 Sensor exhaust temperature. WARNING
520688 16 P11A500 Exhaust temperature higher than WARNING
normal.

Error codes transmission Dana Spicer Off-Highway

TE17000FF
Error codes from the transmission generally have error code level
"WARNING", but error codes from the transmission can specify another
error code level in accordance with the action column in the table below.
Error codes for the transmission are sorted in numerical order. The
table contains the following information:
• SPN - Specifies component, SPN is the error code that is shown in
the machine, in accordance with SAE J1939.
• Supplier-code indicates the error code in accordance with the
supplier's specification in decimal form.
• Supplier-code2 indicates the error code in accordance with the
supplier's specification in hexadecimal form.
in question.
Table Error codes transmission Dana TE17000FF
SPN FMI Supplier Supplier code 2 Description Action

code
520349 12 00.50 7F09D Memory error in control STOP
unit transmission.
Transmission in
locked neutral position
(Shutdown).
unit transmission.
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
unit transmission.
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
unit transmission.
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520293 1 20.60 7F065 Logical error Pressure STOP
sensor gear 1/3
(B7651). Transmission
in locked neutral position
(Shutdown).
520293 0 20.61 7F065 Logical error Pressure STOP
sensor gear 1/3
(B7651). Transmission
(Shutdown).
520297 1 21.00 7F069 Oil pressure sensor. STOP
Transmission in
(Shutdown).

Table Error codes transmission Dana TE17000FF (continued)

code
520297 0 21.01 7F069 Oil pressure sensor. STOP
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520298 1 22.00 7F06A Oil pressure sensor. STOP
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520298 0 22.01 7F06A Oil pressure sensor. STOP
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520299 1 23.00 7F06B Oil pressure sensor. STOP
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520299 0 23.01 7F06B Oil pressure sensor. STOP
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520300 1 24.00 7F06C Oil pressure sensor. STOP
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520300 0 24.01 7F06C Oil pressure sensor. STOP
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520336 1 30.04 7F090 Low battery voltage. STOP
520336 0 30.05 7F090 High battery voltage. WARNING
520339 1 31.00 7F093 Reference voltage to WARNING
sensor is too low.
520339 0 31.01 7F093 Reference voltage to WARNING
sensor is too high.
520379 31 34.00 7F0BB Sensor fault in a speed WARNING
sensor. Transmission in
neutral position.
520380 1 34.01 7F0BC Measured turbine rpm WARNING
at start-up is too low.
Transmission in neutral
position.
520381 0 34.02 7F0BD Measured drum rpm WARNING
at start-up is too
high. Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520382 1 34.03 7F0BE Internal rotation speeds WARNING
indicate that there is
no system pressure
when there should
be. Transmission in
(Shutdown).


code
520382 0 34.04 7F0BE Internal rotation speeds WARNING
indicate that there
is system pressure
when there should not
be. Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520371 0 38.00 7F0B3 Disengaged 4WD/2WD- INFORMATION
selector has jammed
in engaged position or
the feedback signal is
incorrect.
520371 1 38.01 7F0B3 Engaged 4WD/2WD- INFORMATION
selector has jammed
in disengaged position
or the return signal is
incorrect.
520371 7 38.07 7F0B3 4WD/2WD selector is in INFORMATION
changeover mode (tooth
against tooth).
520372 0 39.00 7F0B4 Disengaged Low/High- INFORMATION
selector has jammed
in engaged position or
the feedback signal is
incorrect.
520372 1 39.01 7F0B4 Engaged Low/High- INFORMATION
selector has jammed
in disengaged position
or the return signal is
incorrect.
520286 2 40.06 7F05E Wrong direction from WARNING
the gear selector.
Transmission in neutral
position.
520257 31 40.08 7F041 The seat direction INFORMATION
changed during
operations. Transmission Stop the machine and
in neutral position. select neutral. Check
seat direction or show
the driver how the seat is
turned as per the correct
procedure.
520287 2 41.06 7F05F Incorrect gear selection WARNING
from the gear selector.
Control unit does not
allow change of gear
range, however, operation
of machine is possible.
520320 1 42.04 7F080 Actual gear ratio too low. STOP or WARNING
One or several clutches
slipping. Transmission
(Shutdown).
520320 0 42.05 7F080 Actual gear ratio too high. STOP or WARNING
One or several clutches
slipping. Transmission
(Shutdown).


code
520291 4 43.03 7F063 Sensor temperature WARNING
torque converter.
520291 16 43.07 7F063 Torque converter's WARNING
temperature exceeds
100 °C. Note the error and try
to reduce temperature
in torque converter by
operating calmly.
520291 0 43.08 7F063 Torque converter's WARNING
temperature exceeds
120 °C. Stop the machine, select
neutral and apply full
The control unit protects throttle (limited to 50%) to
the transmission and does cool the transmission oil
not allow the temperature so that temperature drops
in the torque converter below 100 °C (error code
to exceed the maximum 43/03 disappears).
limit. Transmission in
locked neutral position When temperature in
(Shutdown). The engine torque converter is below
is limited to 50 % of the 100 °C, resume work with
maximum speed. machine.
520390 9 44.10 7F0C6 Position accelerator pedal WARNING

no message from engine's
control unit.
520264 2 45.06 7F048 Invalid combination for INFORMATION
redundant digital speed
inputs. The speed is
limited
520246 15 46.05 7F036 Max. torque at inching WARNING
has been exceeded.
Stop the machine, select
neutral. Reselect the
gear.
520315 0 47.01 7F07B Transmission has INFORMATION
exceeded the limit value
for upper rpm. Release the accelerator
pedal and slow down the
machine.
520208 4 50.00 7F010 Pressure sensor gear STOP
1/3. Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520208 3 50.01 7F010 Pressure sensor gear STOP
(Shutdown).
520208 17 50.04 7F010 Pressure sensor gear 1/3. WARNING
520208 15 50.05 7F010 Pressure sensor gear 1/3. WARNING
520209 4 51.00 7F011 Sensor transmission oil WARNING
temperature.
520209 3 51.01 7F011 Sensor transmission oil WARNING
temperature.
520209 17 51.04 7F011 Sensor transmission oil INFORMATION
temperature, value error.
520209 15 51.05 7F011 Sensor transmission oil INFORMATION
temperature, value error.


code
520210 4 52.00 7F012 Temperature monitor INFORMATION
torque converter.
torque converter.
torque converter, value
error.
torque converter, value
error.
520211 4 53.00 7F013 Analogue input signal. INFORMATION
520211 17 53.04 7F013 Analogue input signal, INFORMATION
value error.
value error.
520212 4 54.00 7F014 Reference voltage sensor WARNING
5 V.
520212 3 54.01 7F014 Reference voltage sensor WARNING
5 V.
value error.
value error.
520214 4 56.00 7F016 Pressure sensor gear INFORMATION
2. Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520214 3 56.01 7F016 Pressure sensor gear INFORMATION
2. Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520214 17 56.04 7F016 Pressure sensor gear 2, INFORMATION
value error.
520214 15 56.05 7F016 Pressure sensor gear 2, INFORMATION
value error.
value error.
value error.
value error.


code
value error.
520218 6 60.00 7F01A Sensor rpm drum. STOP or WARNING
If several rpm signals or
the engine rpm signal
are incorrect, control unit
transmission activates
Limp-home.
520218 5 60.01 7F01A Sensor rpm drum. STOP or WARNING
Limp-home.
520218 10 60.03 7F01A Sensor rpm drum, value STOP or WARNING
error.
error.
error.
520219 6 61.00 7F01B Sensor rpm output shaft. STOP or WARNING
Limp-home.
520219 5 61.01 7F01B Sensor rpm output shaft. STOP or WARNING
Limp-home.
520219 10 61.03 7F01B Sensor rpm output shaft, STOP or WARNING
value outside limit values.
value error.
value error.
520220 6 62.00 7F01C Sensor engine rpm. STOP or WARNING
Limp-home.
520220 5 62.01 7F01C Sensor engine rpm. STOP or WARNING
Limp-home.


code
520220 10 62.03 7F01C Engine speed STOP or WARNING
information not available.
Transmission locked to
gear 1 and 2 (Limp-home).
520220 1 62.04 7F01C Sensor engine rpm, value STOP or WARNING
error.
520220 0 62.05 7F01C Sensor engine rpm, value STOP or WARNING
error.
520314 1 62.06 7F07A Faulty engine speed STOP or WARNING
information when
the turbine speed is
calculated. Transmission
locked to gear 1 and 2
(Limp-home).
520221 6 63.00 7F01D Sensor rpm turbine. STOP or WARNING
Limp-home.
520221 5 63.01 7F01D Sensor rpm turbine. STOP or WARNING
Limp-home.
520221 10 63.03 7F01D Sensor rpm turbine value STOP or WARNING
error.
error.
error.
520224 4 70.00 7F020 Servo valve gear STOP
forward/reverse.
Transmission locked to Stop the machine and
gear 1 and 2 (Limp-home). change to neutral. Select
reverse gear.
forward/reverse.
reverse gear.
forward/reverse.
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
forward/reverse.
Transmission in
(Shutdown).


code
forward/reverse.
reverse gear.
520225 4 71.00 7F021 Servo valve gear 1/3. STOP
gear 1 and 2 (Limp-home). Stop the machine and
change to neutral. Select
reverse gear.
reverse gear.
(Shutdown).
reverse gear.
reverse gear.
520226 4 72.00 7F022 Servo valve gear 2. STOP
reverse gear.
reverse gear.
2. Transmission in
(Shutdown).
reverse gear.
reverse gear.
520227 4 73.00 7F023 Analogue output signal. STOP
reverse gear.


code
reverse gear.
520227 6 73.02 7F023 Analogue output STOP
signal. Transmission
(Shutdown).
reverse gear.
reverse gear.
520239 31 77.02 7F02F All gear packages STOP
disengaged.
Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520231 4 80.00 7F027 Solenoid valve driving STOP
forward. Transmission
locked to gear 1 and 2 Stop the machine and
(Limp-home). change to neutral. Select
reverse gear.
reverse gear.
reverse gear.


code
reverse. Transmission
reverse gear.
reverse gear.
reverse gear.
520233 4 82.00 7F029 Solenoid valve STOP
gear selection 1/3.
reverse gear.
gear selection 1/3.
reverse gear.
gear selection 1/3.
reverse gear.
520234 3 83.00 7F02A Digital output signal. STOP
reverse gear.
520234 4 83.01 7F02A Digital output signal. STOP
reverse gear.
520236 31 85.01 7F02C Towing detected. STOP
520388 9 C4.99 7F0C4 Abnormal update rate. WARNING
520352 520352 90.90 31 Software error, STOP
Transmission control
unit. Transmission
locked in neutral position
(Shutdown).
520352 31 90.xx - 7F0A0 Transmission fault STOP or INFORMATION
99.xx Transmission in
(Shutdown).
520192 0 90.xx 7F000 Communication error STOP
CAN bus drivetrain.
One error code per
message. Transmission
(Shutdown).


code
520433 xx 91.xx 7F0F1 Communication error STOP
CAN bus drivetrain.
One error code per
message. Transmission
(Shutdown).
520434 0 92.00 7F0F2 Software error, -
unit.
520434 1 92.01 7F0F2 Shifting has no direction. STOP
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
520434 2 92.02 7F0F2 Doubled direction. STOP
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
520434 3 92.03 7F0F2 Doubled shifting. STOP
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
520434 4 92.04 7F0F2 Doubled pulse pattern. STOP
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
520434 6 92.06 7F0F2 Signal error. STOP
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
520434 7 92.07 7F0F2 Gear control position. STOP
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).


code
520434 14 92.14 7F0F2 Signal error speed STOP
sensor 1-2. Transmission
(Shutdown).
sensor 3. Transmission
(Shutdown).
sensor. Transmission
(Shutdown).
520434 17 92.17 7F0F2 Faulty supply voltage. STOP
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
520434 18 92.18 7F0F2 Signal error sensor. STOP
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
520434 19 92.19 7F0F2 Signal error pressure STOP
sensor. Transmission
(Shutdown).
520434 20 92.20 7F0F2 Incorrect configuration. STOP
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
520435 0 93.00 7F0F3 Memory error, STOP
unit. Transmission Switch off the machine
locked in neutral position and the main electrical
(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.


code
(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.

unit. Switch off the machine
and the main electrical
power.
unit. Switch off the machine
and the main electrical
power.
(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.


code
(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.

(Shutdown). power.
520347 31 95.71 7F09B Control unit cannot STOP

interpret input data.
Transmission locked
in neutral position
(Shutdown).
520436 22 95.72 7F09B Memory error, STOP
(Shutdown). power.
520436 23 95.73 7F09B Memory error, STOP

(Shutdown). power.
520438 0 99.90 7F0F6 Hardware fault. STOP

Transmission locked
in neutral position Switch off the machine
(Shutdown). and the main electrical
power.
520438 1 99.91 7F0F6 CPU overload. STOP
Transmission in
locked neutral position Switch off the machine
power.
Transmission in
power.
Transmission in
power.
520394 31 99.95 7F0CA Communication error, STOP
Transmission control unit.
520438 9 9999 7F0F6 Calibration error STOP
hardware. Transmission
(Shutdown).
520417 15 E0.01 7F0E1 Machine's speed is too INFORMATION
high to enable downshift.


code
520418 15 E1.01 7F0E2 Machine speed is too high INFORMATION
to enable change of travel
direction.
520419 15 E2.01 7F0E3 Engine rpm is too high to INFORMATION
enable change of travel
direction or select same
travel direction again.
520420 14 E3.00 7F0E4 Machine's speed INFORMATION
limitation is activated.
520420 15 E3.01 7F0E4 Machine's speed INFORMATION
limitation is activated
regardless of if speed is
above the limit value.
520420 16 E3.02 7F0E4 Machine's speed is higher INFORMATION
than the upper limit value.
520421 17 E4.00 7F0E5 Abnormal speed INFORMATION
reduction. The
transmission disconnects
automatic gearing for a
time.
520421 15 E4.01 7F0E5 Abnormal acceleration. INFORMATION
The transmission
disconnects automatic
gearing for a time.
520416 13 E5.01 7F0E0 Time for calibration INFORMATION
reached.
Calibrate the
transmission.
520422 31 E6.00 7F0E6 The operator is not sitting INFORMATION
in the operator's seat and
the gear selector is not in
neutral and/or the parking
brake is not activated.
520423 15 E7.01 7F0E7 Turbine speed exceed the INFORMATION
limit value. Transmission
control unit forces engine
to idle.
520424 15 E8.01 7F0E8 Conditions to switch INFORMATION
between 2WD and
4WD not satisfied.
The machine must be
stationary.
520425 15 E9.01 7F0E9 Conditions to switch INFORMATION
between High and Low not
satisfied. The machine
must be stationary.
520442 1 E.1.01-05 7F0FA - 7F0FD INFORMATION
520443 2
520444 3
520445 4
5


code
520442 6 E.1.06 7F0FA - 7F0FD Calibration error. INFORMATION
520443
520444
520445
520442 9 E.1.07-09 7F0FA - 7F0FD Calibration error. INFORMATION
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443 12
520444 13
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443 18
520444 19
520445 20
21
22
23
24


code
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443 2
520444 3
520445 4
5
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443 12
520444 13
520445


code
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443 18
520444 19
520445 20
21
22
23
24
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445


code
520443 2
520444 3
520445 4
5
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443 12
520444 13
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445


code
520443 18
520444 19
520445 20
21
22
23
24
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
520443
520444
520445
- - xx.49 - Undefined failure. STOP
Control unit transmission can generate two states with reduced

functionality to protect the transmission in the event of serious
malfunctions:
• "Limp-home"
In this condition only gear 1-2 in each direction can be used. When
the error occurs the transmission shifts to neutral position. To
continue, set the travel direction selector to neutral position and
select the travel direction again.
• "Shutdown"
In this mode the transmission is permanently in neutral to protect
the transmission.

5 Handling – Operating 177
5.4 Operating
5.4.1 While operating
General
DANGER
The machine's work area is large and visibility from
the operator's cab is restricted.
damage!
Keep in mind:
• Always check that no persons are in the way of the
machine or its equipment. Also check that the area
upwards is free. If there are unauthorised persons
or vehicles within the work area then the machine
must be stopped.
• The operator must always face in the travel
direction and should operate with special care
where persons or vehicles may appear.
• The operator must adapt the speed to the load and
ground conditions, visibility, and wind conditions,
etc.
• The operator must pay extra attention and operate
with special care near electric power lines,
viaducts, docksides, ramps, doorways, etc.
• Always operate carefully so that the attachment
does not collide with posts, power lines, etc.
• Use available visibility-enhancing equipment such
as rear view mirrors and camera ( ).
WARNING
inspection.
WARNING
Never operate the machine without wearing the
seatbelt.
Extreme danger!
Always use the seatbelt when operating the machine,
even when you expect a short shift. The seatbelt must
not be modified.

178 5 Handling – While operating
CAUTION
Never switch off the ignition when the machine is
moving.
Risk of damage to the parking brake.
Stop the machine completely before switching off the
ignition.
Instructions
Make a habit of checking the following at regular intervals while
operating:
• that all gauges are within normal range, optimum operating value is
when the indicator needle is in the centre of the normal operating
range (straight up).
• that fuel indicator on the display shows that there is fuel in the tank.
• that the AdBlue indicator on the display shows that there is AdBlue
in the tank. Applies to machines with Volvo TAD871VE.
• that all warning lights are off.
• that horn, lighting, brake lights and direction indicators function
correctly.
• that all hydraulic functions function correctly.
• that no error codes have been generated (shown on operator's
display with error code indication and symbol). See 5.3 Error
codes, page 100.
When necessary, the control system can set speed limitations for the
machine. This happens in the event of the following:
• high load on the steering axle.
• high load on the drive axle.
• high oil temperature in the brake oil.
• low accumulator pressure brake system.
• incorrect tyre pressure .
• lock of tilt, see Tilting, page 205 .
• pressed down control breaker.
• tilted cab, see Hydraulic cab tilting, page 208 .

5 Handling – While operating 179
Automatic stop function

The automatic stop function means that the engine is switched off
automatically when certain conditions are met.
The automatic function monitors special conditions (see below), and

when all are met it starts a countdown before the engine is stopped.
During the countdown, the event menu for the automatic stop function
is shown in the display. The bar in the menu shows the remaining time
to stop as a percentage of the delay time. When the bar is filled the
engine is stopped. The countdown can be interrupted by breaking any
of the conditions for auto-stop. The delay time can be changed by a
Event menu automatic stop function service technician.
Conditions for auto-stopping the engine:

• Machine has reached operating temperature.
• Battery charging status is OK.
• Machine stationary in neutral position at idling speed.
• Load handling functions inactive.
• Parking brake is activated.
When the engine has been stopped automatically, the engine must be
started in the normal way, see 5.4.2 Starting engine, page 182.
This function is always active in ECO mode and cannot be deactivated.

A service technician can activate/deactivate the automatic stop function
for Normal and Power operating modes.
The function for automatic shutdown of the ignition is available

as an option. When the engine is stopped by this function, and the
operator does not activate any functions, the ignition is also shut down
automatically after a certain predetermined time. The time before
shutdown can be set by a service technician.
If the machine is equipped with the automatic start and stop function
then the function will apply ahead of the automatic stop function, see
Automatic start and stop function, page 180.

180 5 Handling – While operating
Automatic start and stop function
The automatic start and stop function means that the engine is stopped
when the machine is considered to be inactive and the engine is started
automatically when work is resumed.
The automatic function monitors special conditions (see below), and

when all are met it starts a countdown before the engine is stopped.
During the countdown, the event menu for the automatic stop function
is shown in the display. The bar in the menu shows the remaining time
Event menu automatic stop function to stop as a percentage of the delay time. When the bar is fully filled,
the engine is stopped. The countdown can be interrupted by breaking
any of the conditions for auto-stop. The delay time can be set by a
service technician.
Conditions for auto-stopping the engine:

• The machine has operating temperature.
• Battery charging status is OK.
• The operator is sitting in the seat.
• The machine is stationary at idling speed in neutral position
• Load handling functions inactive.
If the parking brake is activated manually (with the control) the bar in
the display is filled immediately, and the engine is stopped immediately.
When the engine is auto-stopped the parking brake is activated

automatically (without the need to move the control). If the engine is
auto-started by depressing the brake pedal then the parking brake
is released.
When the engine has been auto-stopped and is in standby for

automatic start then event menu automatic start function is shown.
If one of the doors is opened then the automatic start function is

temporarily disengaged (the event menu is switched off) until the door
is closed (the event menu is shown again).
NOTE
017365
The automatic start function is disengaged if the operator leaves

the seat. When this takes place, the event menu for the automatic
Event menu automatic start function start function disappears and the engine must be started with the
start button.
When the event menu for the automatic start function is shown, the
engine starts automatically if:
• The accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The brake pedal is depressed.
If the gear selector is in neutral position then the parking brake is
released when the engine is started by means of depressing the
brake pedal.
• Load handling function is activated.
• The start button is depressed.
The machine has a timer for how long the ignition can be activated
after the engine has been auto-stopped. If this time expires then the
ignition is switched off in the same way as during in normal shutdown,
see 5.4.2 Starting engine, page 182. The time for automatic shutdown
of the ignition can be changed by a service technician.

5 Handling – While operating 181
Eco Drive Mode

Eco Drive Mode consists of functions for reducing fuel consumption
and thereby environmental impact.
Eco Drive Mode contains three operating modes for how the machine's
fuel-saving functions should operate.
Depending on options, the operating mode can be set via customer

settings, see Setting of Eco Drive Mode, page 212.
Power
• No limitations activated.
• Automatic stop function, see Automatic stop function, page
179. Can be changed by a service technician.
Normal
• Operator guidance, stage 1.
• Performance loss, stage 1.
• Engine limited to idling speed in neutral position and passive
machine.
• Automatic stop function, see Automatic stop function, page
179. Can be changed by a service technician.
ECO
• Operator guidance, stage 2.
• Performance loss, stage 2.
• Engine limited to idling speed in neutral position and passive
machine.
• Automatic stop function, see Automatic stop function, page 179.
If the machine is equipped with the automatic start and stop function
the automatic start and stop functions will apply throughout the Eco
Drive Mode, see Automatic start and stop function, page 180.

182 5 Handling – Starting engine
5.4.2 Starting engine

General
WARNING
If it's difficult to start the engine, do not use start spray.
Risk of explosion!
In case of start problems, contact service.
Instructions
1. If the machine is equipped with an electric auxiliary heater,
disconnect the electrical cable from the machine .
2. Set the travel direction selector in neutral position or in the position
for activated parking brake.
The travel direction selector must be in neutral position or in the
position for activated parking brake, otherwise it is not possible
to start the engine.
3. Turn the ignition key lock to operating position, position I.
Current is now supplied to all electrical functions.
4. If the machine is equipped with an alcolock, blow in the alcolock .
The alcolock calculates the amount of alcohol in the breath.
In the event of a successful breath test, proceed as follows:
5. Press the start button and hold depressed until the starter motor
starts, release the start button when the engine starts.
When needed, the engine's control unit activates preheating during
a time period. The event menu for preheating indicates whether
preheating is activated, see Event menu preheating, description,
page 86.
NOTE
The starter motor can be activated 20-30 seconds then the circuit
cuts 1.5 to 2 minutes so the starter motor has time to cool. This
is to protect the starter motor.

5 Handling – Warming up 183
5.4.3 Warming up
General
CAUTION
Never rev a cold engine at high engine speeds.
Risk of engine damage!
Run the engine at 1400-1500 rpm until it starts to get
warm.
WARNING
Don't let the engine idle for a long time.
Turn off the engine during breaks in operation and
load handling.
Speed limitation
Engine speed is limited when the oil temperature in the engine,
transmission or hydraulics is too low. When the engine speed is limited,
event menu speed limitation, warm-up mode is shown, see 4.11.2.46
Event menu speed limitation, warm-up mode, page 91.
When the engine, transmission and hydraulics have reached normal

operating temperature, speed limitation is deactivated.
Instructions
Engine
In cold temperatures the machine may not be used for tough work until
the engine and hydraulics are at operating temperature.
If the machine needs to be cold started below 0 °C then an engine

heater and hydraulic oil heater should be used. If the machine is
started below -10 °C without hydraulic oil heater, the pumps may be
damaged in a way that is not covered by warranty.
Start the engine and let it idle for about 10 min, never rev a cold engine
as this can cause engine damage. Now warm run the engine at about
1400-1500 rpm until it starts to get warm. It is very important that the
engine is warmed up and the oil circulates well before the turbocharger
starts to operate at high revs.
Start working with the machine when the coolant has reached normal
operating temperature, approx. 75 °C, see Engine operating menu,
description, page 74.
Transmission
A cold transmission will not shift at temperatures below -12 °C. The
transmission must be warmed up. Follow the instructions for warming
up the engine.

184 5 Handling – Gearshifting
Hydraulic system
Never operate a hydraulic function in the cold until the hydraulic oil is
warm, since there is a risk of damage and leakage in the hydraulic
system.
When the engine has reached its working temperature, warm run the
hydraulic oil by running the mast slowly up and down. Full actuation of
the hydraulic function may not be performed until the tank temperature
is +1 °C.
After this, all other hydraulic functions should be run slowly so that
warm oil circulates through the whole system, and this should be
repeated at least ten times.
NOTE
Hydraulic functions and the steering may feel sticky when the oil
is cold.
5.4.4 Gearshifting
General
The machine is equipped with an automatic transmission. The system
shifts to a lower/higher gear under certain conditions, such as torque,
30
engine speed, travel speed, etc.
A cold transmission will not shift at temperatures below -12 °C. The
transmission must be warmed up, see warming up 5.4.3 Warming
up, page 183.
General about the automatic transmission:

• The transmission is locked in neutral position when the operator is
not sitting in the seat, see Transmission assumes neutral position,
page 187.
• Has a built-in control system, providing optimised operation.
013489
32 31 33 • Shows current gear on the control system display.

• The reversing lock prevents the travel direction being changed too
30. Switch for upshift
quickly, i.e. prevents possible damage to the transmission. The
31. Switch for downshift reversing lock is automatic and is dependent on engine speed
and travel speed.
32. Switch for automatic shifting • Shifting is variable (modulated) and gives smoother operation.
33. Travel direction indicator, Forward Neutral Normally start-up takes place in second gear. Use of first gear is
Reverse governed by engine speed, amongst other things.

5 Handling – Gearshifting 185
Instructions, seat belt requirement while driving
The machine may be equipped with "Seat belt requirement while

driving" in accordance with the requirement in SIS-ISO/TS 3691–8:2012
4.1.10.
If the machine is equipped with seat belt requirement while driving, the
seat belt must be fastened before a gear can be selected.
1 Ignition on/start the machine to activate the switch in the seat, see
5.4.2 Starting engine, page 182.
2 Activate the seat switch.
Seat belt requirement can be bypassed, see Switch for by-pass of

safety system (47), page 46. Activate the by-pass switch, select travel
direction and drive the machine to the workshop. Speed is limited to
5 km/h.
WARNING
No safety system is engaged! Risk of roll-over and
tipping over!
B Only use bypass in emergency situations!
017353
A
A. Switch in driver's seat.
B. Switch in seat belt buckle.
Instructions, gearshifting
1 Deactivate the parking brake by first depressing the service brake
pedal and then move the travel direction selector from the parking
brake position to neutral/gear position.
2 Let the engine run at idle speed. Select travel direction.
a) Travel direction selector
Move the lever (position a):
• forward (F) for travel direction forward.
• reverse (R) for travel direction reverse.
• downwards or upwards (N) for neutral.
a
015234

186 5 Handling – Gearshifting
b) Travel direction selector on control for load handling

Move the switch (position b):
c) Travel direction selector on mini steering wheel or joystick

Move the switch (position c):
c
3 Select automatic or manual shifting:
015435
Automatic shifting
1 Activate automatic shifting with the switch for automatic shifting A
(position 32). The system automatically shifts between all gears.
2 Automatic shifting is disengaged if the switch for upshift or
downshift (position 30, 31) is activated.
Manual shifting
1 Machine gearshifting takes place manually with the switch for
upshift or downshift (position 30, 31). The current gear is shown
on the display.
NOTE
In certain circumstances, the transmission may be forced to
reduce speed due to a problem. The control unit may then set
the transmission in "limp home" mode.
CAUTION
Changing the travel direction must be done with care.
The machine has a reversing lock as standard but
transmission service life is increased if change of
travel direction takes place at a lower travel speed and
engine speed.
Risk of machine damage! Axles may fail!
Change of travel direction must take place within the
limitations set by the reversing lock.

5 Handling – Steering 187
Transmission assumes neutral position

A control breaker senses when the operator leaves the operator's
station. The signal from the control breaker means that the transmission
automatically assumes neutral position. It is not possible to select any
travel direction.
NOTE
If the buzzer sounds when the operator sits in the seat and releases
the parking brake then the control breaker in the seat may be
malfunctioning. It is not possible to select any travel direction. The
function of the switch in the driver's seat must be checked.
The event menu appears if the driver's seat is left without the parking
brake being activated, see The event menu parking brake not activated
and no operator in the driver's seat, description, page 80.
5.4.5 Steering
General
The machine is equipped with servo steering. The steering wheel
movements are transferred hydraulically to the steering wheels on
the ground.
WARNING
The machine may not roll on a downhill grade if the
engine is off.
Hydraulic pressure for steering is missing and steering
capacity is lost! Danger!
Keep the engine running for hydraulic pressure.

188 5 Handling – Service brake
5.4.6 Service brake

General
The brake pedal (position 12) used as service brake.
Use the brakes in a smooth but firm way. Brake pressure remains for
a time after the engine has been switched off, accumulated during
operation. If the accumulator pressure drops below a certain level then
the event menu shows low accumulator pressure. When the event
menu is shown the capacity of the service brake is limited. The buzzer
sounds and speed is limited. Finally, the parking brake is applied
automatically by a forceful spring in the brake cylinder. Check the
11 accumulators' sealing integrity if the pressure does not build up and is
not maintained, see chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance.
015214
12
The service brake is combined with the declutching pedal. The drive is
declutched completely at a certain brake pressure.
11. Accelerator
12. Brake pedal

5 Handling – Parking brake 189
5.4.7 Parking brake

General
DANGER
or extreme danger!
WARNING
Never leave the operator's station without first applying
the parking brake.
Risk of machine starting to roll! Danger!
Apply the parking brake before leaving the operator's
station.
The parking brake is operated with the travel direction selector (position
1) adjacent to the steering wheel. Activate the parking brake by lifting
the control upward toward the steering wheel and then forward to
the parking brake position. The indicator light for the parking brake
(position 16) is lit red when the parking brake is applied and the event
menu appears, see Event menu parking brake, description, page 82.
To be able to deactivate the parking brake there must be an

accumulated brake pressure or the engine is started in order to reach
the brake pressure required when depressing the brake pedal.
Instructions
The parking brake is applied when:
• When the travel direction selector is moved to the position for the
parking brake (parking brake indicator light is lit red) and the event
menu for parking brake applied is shown, see Event menu parking
brake, description, page 82.
• The ignition is switched off (ignition key lock to 0 position).
When the machine is started again the parking brake is applied
without the travel direction selector being in the position for
activated parking brake. The indicator light for the parking brake
flashes to indicate that the parking brake must be activated and
deactivated with the travel direction selector to release the parking
brake. The light flashes even if the service brake is not activated at
the same time as you try to release the parking brake, even the
event menu is shown, see Event menu release the parking brake,
1 description, page 86.
015215
Check the sealing integrity of the accumulators if pressure is not

built up and maintained, see 6 Inspection and maintenance, page
1. Travel direction selector on steering column 221.
An audible signal is activated if the operator gets up from the driver's

seat without first applying the parking brake and the event menu is
shown, The event menu parking brake not activated and no operator in
the driver's seat, description, page 80.

190 5 Handling – Parking brake
If the accumulator pressure drops below a certain level an error code is

shown in the display. The capacity of the service brake is restricted with
a low accumulator pressure error code. If the accumulator pressure
drops further, the parking brake is applied automatically by a strong
spring in the brake cylinder.
If the machine needs to be moved, see 7 Transporting the machine,

page 257.
Emergency brake
The parking brake can be used as emergency brake in emergency
situations.
CAUTION
The parking brake can be used as an EMERGENCY
BRAKE.
Brake shoe linings wear out and lose their braking
performance! Risk of unwanted movement by the
parked machine!
After emergency braking with the parking brake the
brake shoe linings must be checked as soon as
possible and replaced if necessary. Braking action of
the parking brake may be lost as the brake shoe linings
may have been worn down.
If the parking brake has been released mechanically
then it must always be reset to restore the machine's
DANGER
or extreme danger!

5 Handling – Heating / Air conditioning 191
5.4.8 Heating / Air conditioning

General
The heating/air conditioning system (ECC) obtains heat from the
38 39 40 43 engine's cooling system and provides heat when the engine is warm,
the cooling function is generated by the cooling compressor.
37 If necessary, the air conditioning can be controlled manually with the

switches for the fan, heating and air distribution. In addition to this there
36 are functions for recirculation and defroster.
In the event of an open door, the air conditioning's cooling compressor

35 is switched off (cooling function and air drying stop). Close the door
and the cooling function is activated again.
NOTE
012820
41 42 44 45 46
Open windows disrupt air conditioning function and capacity.
Panel for heating and air conditioning system
NOTE
Paper and similar located on the inner front panel can significantly
reduce air conditioning function and performance.
Setting the heating/air conditioning system

1 Activate automatic regulation of the air conditioning (position 39)
to achieve optimal function of the system.
Fan speed, temperature control and air distribution in the cab take
place automatically.
2 Set desired temperature (position 41, 42).
Set the temperature within temperature range 16 °C to 28 °C. See
temperature in display.
Setting of min. and max. respectively, shuts off automatic climate
control (control of fan, temperature and air distribution) and sets
the heat valve in min. (LO) and max. (HI) position respectively.
Cooling is activated/deactivated with the switch for cooling
(position 43).
3 Align the panel nozzles as follows:
• in cold weather, aim the panel nozzles against the windows,
• in hot weather, aim the panel nozzles upwards.
4 Manual setting the fan's capacity is made with the switch for the
fan (position 38, 40). Return to automatic control with the switch
(position 39).
Manual control is possible in five steps from Off to Max. Fan speed
is indicated by a bar in the operating menu.
NOTE
When the fan is switched off all functions for heating/air
conditioning are stopped.
NOTE
When setting the fan capacity manually, automatic control of the
fan is stopped.

192 5 Handling – Heating / Air conditioning
5 Manual setting of air distribution is performed using the switch for

air distribution (position 44, 45, 46).
NOTE
When setting the air distribution manually, automatic control of
the air distribution is stopped.
6 Normally, recirculation (position 36) and defroster (position 37)

do not have to be used.
Mist on windows
WARNING
Misting on the windscreens can lead to limited visibility
from the cab.
damage!
Make sure the windscreens are free of mist before
using the machine.
1 Set a warm temperature (position 41). Ideally use the defroster

function.
2 Set a fan speed to a faster position (position 40).
3 Direct air distribution (position 46) and panel nozzles to the
windscreen for good visibility through the windows.
4 Check that recirculation (position 36) is not engaged. Recirculation
may impair effective demisting.
5 Activate defroster (position 37).
The defroster controls the function fan, temperature and damper
015236
position to optimally heat and more quickly dry the air at the
windscreen for faster demisting. The function is active for 6
A minutes.
A NOTE
A. Panel nozzles The defroster function is active for 6 minutes. Check that
temperature control returns to the set value when the defroster
is switched off.
6 If there is a lot of mist, direct the panel nozzles to the windscreen

for optimal demisting.
The cooling function will be active and help to dry the air.

5 Handling – Heating / Air conditioning 193
Setting the diesel heater

Direct start of heater
The diesel heater is controlled by a separate timer with display, fitted

in the cab. Running time and up to three activation times can be set
using the timer.
If the timer display is in standby mode, it can be activated by means

of a short press on one of the buttons. A short press is less than 2
seconds and a long press is more than 2 seconds.
Direct start of heater
1. The heater is activated directly by means of a long press on button
A. Menu bar 2 (E).
B. Status field/Input field (The exception is if the timer is programmed or if it is in setting
mode.)
C. Selection front / rear
D. Button 1 Shutdown of heater
E. Button 2 1. If the heater is operating, it is shut down by means of a long press
on button 1 (D).
Quick start of heater, with setting of time or temperature
1. By means of a short press on button 2 (E), when the display is
illuminated, there is the option to set target temperature (only
air heater) or the time at which the heater should be running.
The setting is made using the buttons for option (C) and is then
confirmed using button 2 (E).
Activating/deactivating programs (P1, P2, P3)
1. Activate the display.
2. Press front / rear (C) until the P-symbol flashes in the menu bar
(A). Confirm the selection with a short press on button 2 (E).
3. Select program memory (P1, P2, P3) using the buttons for option
(C), confirm with button 2 (E).
4. Set whether the selected program should be active or inactive
using the buttons for option (C). Confirm with button 2 (E)
Change in programs
2. Select program memory (P1, P2, P3) using the buttons for option
(C), confirm with button 2 (E).
3. Select, using the buttons for option (C), the position for settings.
Confirm with button 2 (E).
4. Select, using the buttons for option (C), the desired day or group of
days. Confirm with button 2 (E).
5. Set the start time (hours) using the buttons for option (C). Confirm
with button 2 (E).
6. Set the start time (minutes) using the buttons for option (C).
Confirm with button 2 (E).
7. Set the desired operating mode, heating or ventilation. Use the
buttons for option (C). Confirm with button 2 (E).
8. Set the temperature (only air heating) or for how long the heater
should be activated. Use the buttons for option (C) and confirm
with button 2 (E).

194 5 Handling – Heating / Air conditioning
Setting the clock

2. Select Settings in the menu bar (A). Use the buttons for option (C)
and confirm with button 2 (E).
3. Select Set time in the input field (B). Use the buttons for option (C)
4. Set hours using the buttons for option (C) and confirm with button
2 (E).
5. Set minutes using the buttons for option (C) and confirm with
button 2 (E).
6. Press button 1 (D) to return to Settings.
Setting the day of the week
2. Select Settings in the menu bar (A). Use the buttons for option (C)
3. Select Day of the week in the input field (B). Use the buttons for
option (C) and confirm with button 2 (E).
4. Select the correct day using the buttons for option (C) and confirm
with button 2 (E).
5. Press button 1 (D) to return to Settings.

5 Handling – Stopping the engine - parking 195
5.4.9 Stopping the engine - parking

General
NOTE
Never disconnect the system voltage with the battery disconnector
when the engine is running! The voltage regulator may be
damaged.
WARNING
Always turn off the electric power when the machine is
left, e.g. when parking or at the end of the shift.
Risk of fire!
Turn off the electric power with the battery
disconnector.
Instructions
1. Stop the machine and set the travel direction selector in the
position for parking brake.
2. Run in the boom completely and lower it to its lowest position.
3. For tiltable cab : Lower the cab to the original position.
4. Let the engine run 1 minute at idle speed before stopping the
engine so that the engine cools down slightly and the turbo
bearings are lubricated.
5. Stop the engine by turning the ignition key lock to position 0.
If the start button (position 15) is pressed for more than one second
when the engine is already running then just the engine is stopped.
If the machine is going to be parked for a long time, e.g. after a
work shift is over, then the battery disconnector should be turned
to the OFF (0) position.
For machines with Volvo TAD871VE:
NOTE
Wait for two minutes before the system voltage is disconnected
with the battery disconnector so that the SCR system has time to
be drained of AdBlue, this is particularly important in cold weather.
Certain machines are equipped with automatic engine stop:

• In case the operator leaves the machine for some time without
stopping the engine, normally 10 minutes.

196 5 Handling – Load handling
5.5 Load handling

General
During all lifting work, make sure that the max. lift capacity is not
exceeded, see machine plate or load diagram.
The machine's capacity is indicated by two parameters:

• number of containers in height
• load size and its centre of gravity in relation to the machine
The capacity varies between different models and versions, see

machine and type plates 3.2 Plates, page 25.
It is important to estimate the position of the centre of gravity. If the

machine appears to be side-heavy, the load should be lowered and
adjusted with side shift so that the load's centre of gravity is moved to a
position along the machine's centre line.
The function load handling refers to, e.g., to lift, lower, rotate, angle or
hold loads. Load handling also includes auxiliary functions to handle
the load, e.g. rotation stop.
Load handling subfunctions.

017852
• Lift/lower
Lift and lower
• Extension
Extension
• Side shift
Side shift stop
Side shift
• Spreading (positioning)
Automatic spreading 20' to 40'
30' stop
Spreading (positioning)

5 Handling – Load handling 197
• Rotation
Rotation stop ±25°
Rotation
• Damping
Damping with adjustable tilt
017857
Tilt
• Twistlocks
017858
Twistlocks
Overload system
The machine is equipped with a warning system, LLMC (Longitudinal
Load Moment Control). Warning systems must ALWAYS be functional!
The system is used for stationary load handling, so that the machine's
forward stability is not jeopardised.
When the machine approaches the stability limit, the following takes
place:
• buzzer in the cab sounds (indication to operator)
See 2.1 Safety and emergency equipment, page 8.
• warning figure is shown on the display (indication to operator)
See Event menu overload, description, page 79.
• boom movement is interrupted.
In this position the boom, and thus the load, can only be retracted
until the buzzer stops sounding and the display figure disappears.
NOTE
Retract the boom completely before it is lowered! Applies for all
load handling!
LLMC is not intended for controlling lateral stability or stability during

operation. In addition, it does not take sloping ground conditions into
consideration.
For advice on the handling of the machine, see 2.4 Keep in mind,
page 11.

198 5 Handling – Lifting load
5.5.1 Lifting load

General
WARNING
Do not use a machine where the indicator lights are
out of order.
Danger of reduced safety during load handling!
If the indicator lights don't work, stop work with the
machine and repair.
WARNING
The machine's load capacity is limited!
It is forbidden to exceed the machine's load capacity.
See the rating plate and load diagrams. The machine's
stability limit can be exceeded if the overloading
system is not working.
Instructions for top lift attachment
NOTE
1 Run towards the stack of containers, as close as possible. Strive

to line up the machine's centre with the centre of the container.
2 Hold the machine stationary with the service brake. Alternatively,
apply the parking brake if required and/or shift to neutral.
3 Position the attachment slightly above the container. Adjust with

rotation, side shift and boom in/out.
4 Set spreading to container length in question.
Right light, C — Twistlocks unlocked, red light illuminates, indicates
that load is not secured.
5
Use adjustable tilt or in order to move the attachment parallel with
the load, see Tilting, page 205.

5 Handling – Lifting load 199
6 Lower the attachment on the container.

The display shows the event menu for contact and indicates when
one to three twistlocks have contact.
Lowering speed is dampened automatically when the
attachment approaches the container.
7 Middle light, B – Contact, orange light activated, indicates when
all four corner boxes have correct contact against the container,
event menu contact is switched off.
8 Lock twistlocks with the switch for twistlocks (position 60).
If automatic locking of twistlocks is used, locking is automatic when
the attachment is in contact with the load.
Locking alternative is selected with the switch for automatic or
manual locking (position 60).
NOTE
For automatic locking of twistlocks, the parking brake must be
released.
9 Right light, C - Twistlocks unlocked, off.

Left light, A - Twistlocks locked, illuminates with green light and
indicates that load is secured and ready for lifting.
The lift function is disengaged when both right light, C - Twistlocks
unlocked, and left light, A - Twistlocks locked, are off. Left light, A -
Twistlocks locked, is activated with green light when the locking
process has been completed.
CAUTION
Do not start to lift if light C "Twistlocks unlocked" is
on, or if any of the lights A "Twistlocks locked" or B
"Contact" are off.
The load is not secured!
Try to lock twistlocks once again.
10 Ready for lifting.

When the container is lifted, the light for contact (position B)
should go out. Use side shift to centre the load so that its lateral
point-of-gravity is along the machine's centre line.
Instructions for lifting with "slings"

Attachment points or hooks are located at each twistlock/corner box
on the attachment. These are used for handling with lifting "slings".
Maximum weight for lifting with "slings" is 10 tonnes.
Bear in mind the following when lifting with "slings":

• The equipment used to lift with "slings" must be correctly
Max 15˚
dimensioned as well as approved for such usage and for the load
to be lifted.
• Use "slings" that are as short as possible.
• The load must always be lifted vertically using all four corners with
the load equally distributed to the four lifting points (see figure).
• When lifting and transporting a load suspended in "slings", drive
002564
slowly (below 5 km/h) and pay close attention to the position of

the load.

200 5 Handling – Transporting load
5.5.2 Transporting load

General
WARNING
Transporting loads is associated with major risks.
Risk of roll-over and tipping over! Chance of load
damage to property! Extreme danger!
Respect the lifting capacity of the machine and
exercise the greatest caution during load handling:
• The machine must only be operated on even
surfaces, intended for the machine's total weight
and ground pressure.
• All transporting of loads must take place in
transport position. Exercise caution when
operating, think about the width and height so
that the boom or attachment does not collide with
poles, cables, etc.
• Do not transport the load in a higher position than
necessary since this may cause the machine to roll
or tip over.
• Always operate with the load facing uphill on an
uphill or downhill grade, never operate or turn
across a grade.
• Operate the machine in reverse if the transported
load obscures visibility to the front.
• No personnel may encroach or stand under a
raised load.
• The operator must avoid forceful acceleration
and heavy braking to prevent risk of tipping and
roll-over.
• The operator must always adjust the speed when
turning to prevent skidding and risk of roll-over or
tipping over.
In the event of tipping or roll-over, hold onto the
steering wheel and remain in the cab. Do NOT
attempt to jump out of the cab until any movement
of the machine has finished.
When handling special loads local regulations may
apply. Learn about them and follow them.
Note that illustrations in this section show transport with top lift
attachment and container.

5 Handling – Transporting load 201
NOTE
1 Lift the load slightly.

2
Loosen the tilt lock, see Tilting, page 205.
CAUTION
Locking increases the loads on the machine.
Increased mechanical wear.
Disengage the lock function when it is not required
in order to minimise wear on the machine. When the
lock function is active the machine's speed is limited
for extra protection.
3 Back away from the stack.
4 Adjust load height and boom to transport position.
DANGER
Load handling requires extreme care when loading
and at high load handling height, that is, long boom
extension.
Risk of roll-over! Extreme danger!
When a load is to be lowered, ALWAYS retract the
boom BEFORE the boom is lowered.
5 Correct transport position is with the load as far down and in as

possible without obstructing visibility, see Transport position, page
202. The load's centre of gravity must be centred laterally.

202 5 Handling – Transporting load
Transport position
When the machine is to be operated with or without load, assume the
transport position to minimise the risk of roll-over and imbalance while
operating. In transport position, the boom is completely retracted, the
load's centre of gravity is centred sideways (laterally) and the load is
lifted for good forward visibility (see illustration to the left). Do not lift
the load higher than necessary in order to have a clear view.
When transporting a load suspended in "slings", drive slowly (below 5

km/h) and pay close attention to the position of the load.
Operating on grades
It is important to operate with extreme care on grades since there's an

increased risk of tipping and rolling over.
NOTE
When braking, pay attention that the transmission is disengaged
during braking.
• Operating with a load.

Lower the load as low as possible without compromising visibility.
Retract the boom as far as possible.
Always operate with the load against the grade (see figure),
regardless of travel direction.
• Operating without a load.
Lower and retract the boom as far as possible.
Always operate with the attachment in the direction of the grade
(down), regardless of travel direction.
Working near overhead high voltage power lines

Operate with extreme care in all work near overhead high voltage
power lines, keeping in mind the extensive reach capacity of the boom
and attachment.
DANGER
If the machine comes into contact with overhead high
voltage power lines. Remain seated and call for help!
Extreme danger!
Remain in the cab. Wait for assistance.

5 Handling – Unloading 203
5.5.3 Unloading
NOTE
1 Run towards the stack of containers, as close as possible.

2 Lift the load over the stack.
Strive to centre the load over the stack. The approach angle
toward the container can be varied.
3 Apply the parking brake if desired, or hold the machine stationary

with the service brake. Alternatively, shift to neutral.
4 Position the load over the stack. Adjust with rotation, side shift
and boom in/out.
5
Use adjustable tilt or in order to move the load parallel with the
unloading location, see Tilting, page 205.
6 Lower the load.

When contact is obtained, the middle light, B - Contact, is activated.
7 Open twistlocks. Left light, A - Twistlocks locked, goes out (green)
when release of twistlocks is initiated. Right light, C - Twistlocks
unlocked, illuminates (red) when the twistlocks are completely
open.
Never lift when twistlocks are in the process of being released.
8 Lift the attachment so that it moves clear of the load.
9 Back away from the load.

204 5 Handling – Functions for load handling
5.5.4 Functions for load handling

Automatic spreading 20'–40'
Automatic spreading means that the spreading moves automatically to

the next stop when spreading is activated with the control lever if the
switch for automatic spreading 20'-40' (position 57) is activated. When
automatic spreading is in progress, a buzzer sounds on the attachment
to warn of movement of the machine's parts.
To stop an ongoing automatic spreading, activate spreading in or out of

with the control lever.
The spreading function is dampened for a short time before one of

the stops 20' (30' if the function is activated ) or 40'. To continue
spreading to the end position 40', repeat the instantaneous function
selection with the control lever.
A buzzer on the attachment sounds during automatic spreading. To

stop an ongoing automatic 20' to 40' spreading, activate spreading
in or out of with the control lever.
NOTE
Automatic spreading can only be activated with closed doors and
released parking brake.
Instructions
1 Activate switch for automatic spreading 20'–40' (position 57).
2 Close the doors.
3 Disengage the parking brake.
4 Check that nothing is in the way of an intended spreading
movement.
5 Activate spreading with the control lever.
6 Closely monitor the attachment's spreading booms and stop the
spreading in the event of a risk of collision.
To stop an ongoing automatic spreading, activate spreading in
or out of with the control lever.
Spreading stop at 30'
As an option, the machine can be equipped with extra stops for the
spreading in order to facilitate handling the load with special spacing
between the lifting points (normally 30' or 35').
When the switch is set in position 1, an extra stop is activated, which

means that the spreading function will be dampened and stop between
the outer and inner end position, at the extra stop. To go past the extra
stop, activate spreading again when the spreading has been stopped.
The distance for extra spreading stops is fixed, and cannot be changed
without conversion of the machine.

5 Handling – Functions for load handling 205
Rotation stop
Rotation stop limits the rotational movement of the attachment ±25°.

When the limit for rotation stop is reached, the rotational movement
stops and the event menu for rotation stop is shown in the display.
Use the switch for by-pass of safety system (position 47) to bypass
the rotation stop.
The event menu for rotation stop disappears from the display when the
rotation of the attachment is within the interval for permitted rotation.
Event menu rotation stop
Tilting
Tilting means that the angle of the attachment can be controlled with
the control lever (position 53), see Control lever (53), page 58, this is
017857
useful for handling loads with uneven centre of gravity.
Tilting is intended for use when lifting and unloading loads, when the
load is transported it should "hang freely" in order to reduce the loads
on the machine.
CAUTION
Locking increases the loads on the machine.
Increased mechanical wear.
Disengage the lock function when it is not required
in order to minimise wear on the machine. When the
lock function is active the machine's speed is limited
for extra protection.
Instructions
1 Operate the machine forward to the load in the same way as for
normal lifting, see Instructions for top lift attachment, page 198.
2 Tilt the attachment so that the contact surface is parallel with the
load, using the control lever (position 53).
3 Lock the tilt with the switch for tilt lock on the control lever (position
53e).
Machine speed is limited to a maximum of 5 km/h when the tilt is
locked.
4 Lift the load in the same way as for normal lifting.
5 Reverse away so that the load hangs freely.
53e. Switch, tilt lock
6 Unlock the tilt lock with the switch for tilt lock on the control lever
(position 53e).

Scales
Load weight is approximated with the operating menu for scales.
NOTE
For calibration, contact service personnel.
Instructions
1 Perform the lifting movement and then lower the load slowly about
10 cm.
2 Select the operating menu for the scales with or and confirm
with . A border around the row for the current weight (position
b) indicates that the function is activated.
3 The different rows have different functions:
Select row with or . Confirm the selection with .
Undo the selection with .
a. Shows tare weight in tonnes or pounds (lbs).
The value shown in row (a) can be reset to zero (tared) using
the function keys.
Select taring with or .
Switch between taring (current tare weight is displayed) or to
no tare (0 shown). Confirm with .
b. Current weight in tonnes or pounds (lbs), (net weight).
The value in row (b) can be added to row (c).
Select row (b) with or .
Add the value in row (b) to row (c) with .
c. Total weight in tonnes or pounds (lbs) (gross weight).
The value in the row (c) can be reset.
Select row (c) with or .
The value on row (c) can be reset with .
Leave the menu with .
Load counter
The number of lifts is recorded in the operating menu for load counter.
The different counters can be reset to zero separately.
Instructions
1 Select the operating menu for load counter with or and
confirm with . A frame around the row shows the selected
counter.
Undo selection with .
2 Select counter with or . A frame around the row shows the
selected counter.
Undo selection with .
a. Top lift counter 1.
b. Top lift counter 2.
3 Reset the counter to zero with .

5 Handling – Functions for load handling 207
Height limitation
Height limitation restricts how high the boom can be operated. Height
limitation is adjustable according to the customer needs.
When the boom reaches a preset height (position A), the lifting
movement is stopped and the event menu for height limitation shows
the machine's total height. Lower or retract the boom to continue load
handling.
When it is necessary to lift above the height limitation the function can
be by-passed with the switch for by-pass of safety system (position 47).
When the height limitation has been passed (the grey field in the figure,
covering about 70 cm) lifting, lowering or extension can be operated
without bypassing.
Speed limitation, load position
As an option, the machine can be equipped with a function that

automatically limits the speed when the position of the load is outside
a predefined area (grey in figure). The size of the area is based on
machine type, load position and load weight. Speed limitation increases
gradually when the position of the load approaches the outer edges of
the area. To avoid speed limitation, you can lower or retract the boom,
see Event menu speed limitation, load position, description, page 91.

Hydraulic cab tilting

(Standard for DRG 100-54S8.)
Tiltable cab simplifies visibility during load handling at high lifting

heights.
The switch for automatic cab tilt (position 50) is used to select whether
the cab should be tilted automatically or manually. The switch for cab
tilt (position 63) controls manual tilting.
The operator's door(s) must be closed and the control breaker for
hydraulics must not be activated.
NOTE
lowest position.
WARNING
When entering under a tilted cab.
Extreme danger!
Check that nobody is under or near a tilted cab.
Visibility is impaired!
Instructions
1 Run toward the load handling site and stop the machine.
2 With automatic cab tilting active:
• The cab is tilted automatically when the attachment is at a
predetermined boom height (boom angle).
• For automatic cab tilt, speed must not exceed 15 km/h, the
operator doors must be closed and the parking brake not
activated.
With manual cab tilting active:
• Operate cab tilting with the switch for manual cab tilting
(position 63).
• Hold in the switch during the entire movement.
• For manual cab tilt to be possible, speed must not exceed 15
km/h and the operator's doors must be closed.
• If the cab is not in the lowest position, i.e. tilted, the machine's
speed is limited to 10 km/h.

5 Handling – Customer settings via display 209
5.6 Customer settings via display

5.6.1 Menu for machine settings
Description
Setting the time
1 Select menu for customer settings with or and confirm with
.
2 Select SET TIME/DATE with or and confirm with .

a. Setting the date and time
b. Setting units
c. Setting of Eco Drive Mode
d. Setting of automatic start and stop function
3 Select SET TIME with or and confirm with .

014935
4 Adjust the hours with and , confirm with . Continue in this

way with the minutes and seconds. Leave the menu with .
014941

210 5 Handling – Menu for machine settings
Setting the date

.

b. Setting units
3 Select SET DATE with or and confirm with .

015322
4 Adjust the year with and , confirm with . Continue in this

way with the month and day. Leave the menu with .
014942
Setting the time format

.

5 Handling – Menu for machine settings 211

b. Setting units
3 Select SET TIME STYLE with or and confirm with .
015323
4 Select the time format 24h or 12h am/pm with or . Leave

the menu with .
014943
Setting of display units

.
2 Select SET SI/US UNITS with or and confirm with .

b. Setting units

3 Select SI UNITS or US UNITS with or . Leave the menu

with .
014936
Setting of Eco Drive Mode
The menu is only available if the machine is set for Eco Drive Mode
to be selectable by the operator.
.
2 Select SET ECO DRIVE MODE with or and confirm with .

b. Setting units
3 Select POWER, NORMAL or ECO with or . Leave the menu

with .
For a more detailed description, see Eco Drive Mode, page 181.
017376

5 Handling – Menu for machine settings 213
Setting of automatic start and stop function

.
2 Select SET AUTO START AND STOP with or and confirm

with .
b. Setting units
3 Select off or on with or . Leave the menu with .

For a more detailed description, see Automatic start and stop
function, page 180.
Setting of display language

.

2 Select SET LANGUAGE with or and confirm with .

a. Setting units
b. Setting of Eco Drive Mode
c. Setting of automatic start and stop function
d. Setting of display language
3 Select off or on with or . Leave the menu with .
Setting of sensitivity for joystick control or mini-wheel

.
2 Select SET COMFORT STEERING with or and confirm

with .
3 Set the sensitivity of the joystick with or and store the value
with .
The sensitivity is set in stages where 0 = no deflection and 10
= max valve deflection.

5 Handling – Menu for active error codes 215
5.6.2 Menu for active error codes

Description
1 Select the menu for ACTIVE ERRORS with or and confirm
with .
a b c 2 The menu shows the active error codes.

Scroll through the error codes with or . Leave the menu
with .
d
a. Device that generated the error code.
k e b. Component error code concerns (SPN code).

c. Type of error (FMI code).
d. Number of active error codes. The first digit shows the error
j being displayed, the second digit the number of active error
codes.
i e. Information can be found in the operator's manual.

f. Symbol for the device that generated the error code.
014944
h g f g. Symbol for operator action.

h. Symbol for the error code level.
i. Number of error codes with the level INFORMATION.
j. Number of error codes with the level WARNING.
k. Number of error codes with the level STOP.
For more information, see Error codes, general, page 100.

216 5 Handling – Menu for inactive error codes
5.6.3 Menu for inactive error codes

Description
1 Select the menu for INACTIVE ERRORS with or and confirm
with .
2 The menu shows the inactive error codes.

Scroll through the error codes with or . Leave the menu
with .
For more information, see Error codes, general, page 100.

014945
5.6.4 Menu for statistics and history

Description
1 Select the menu for running times with or and confirm with .
2 The menu shows the cumulative operating time for the machine's
components. This counter cannot be reset.
a. Operating time engine in hours.
b. Operating hours for transmission, with gear activated, in hours.
c. Operating hours for hydraulic functions activated, in hours.
d. Proportion of engine operating hours at idling speed, in
percent.
Select the next statistics and history menu with or go back with
. Leave the menu with .

5 Handling – Menu for statistics and history 217
3 The menu shows resettable operating time, since the last reset
for the machine's components.
a. Operating time engine in hours.
b. Operating hours for transmission, with gear activated, in hours.
c. Operating hours for hydraulic functions activated, in hours.
d. Proportion of engine operating hours at idling speed, in
percent.
Select which row should be reset by pressing momentarily.
Select row with or . Reset the row with .
Reset all rows by pressing for more than 2 seconds.
4 The menu shows driving distances.
a. Cumulative driving distance in km or miles. This counter
cannot be reset.
b. Driving distance odometer 1 since last reset to zero in km or
miles.
c. Driving distance odometer 2 since last reset to zero in km or
miles.
5 The menu shows accumulated fuel statistics. This counter cannot
be reset.
a. Total fuel consumption in litres or gallons.
b. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour.
c. Average fuel consumption in litres/100 km or gallons/100
miles.
d. Average fuel consumption in litres/lift or gallons/lift.
6 The menu shows resettable fuel statistics since the last reset.
a. Fuel usage in litres or gallons.
b. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour.
c. Average fuel consumption in litres/100 km or gallons/100
miles.
d. Average fuel consumption in litres/lift or gallons/lift.
7 The menu shows accumulated load statistics. This counter cannot
be reset.
a. Total number of lifts.
b. Average lift rate in number of lifts/hour.

218 5 Handling – Menu for statistics and history
8 The menu shows resettable load statistics.

a. Number of lifts counter 1.
b. Number of lifts counter 2.
c. Average lift rate in number of lifts/hour.
9 The menu shows accumulated load counter.

a. Total number of lifts in 20'-position (including OHC ).
b. Total number of lifts in 30'-position (including OHC ).
c. Total number of lifts in 40'-position (including OHC ).
10 The menu shows resettable load counter.

a. Number of lifts in 20'-position (including OHC ).
b. Number of lifts in 30'-position (including OHC ).
c. Number of lifts in 40'-position (including OHC ).
11 The menu shows resettable load statistics.

a. Cumulative lifting load of 1000s of tonnes. This counter
cannot be reset.
b. Total lifting load since last reset to zero in tonnes.
c. Average load per lift since last reset to zero in tonnes/lift or
pounds/lift.
12 The menu shows resettable load and fuel statistics.
a. Average lifting load since last reset to zero in tonnes/hour or
pounds/hour.
b. Average fuel consumption since last reset to zero in litres/hour
or gallons/hour.
c. Average fuel consumption since last reset to zero in litres/100
tonnes or gallons/100 tonnes.

5 Handling – Menu for services and settings 219
13
The menu shows the cumulative statistics for the automatic start
and stop function.
a. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour,
including the time that the engine has been auto-stopped.
b. The time that the engine has been switched off by the
automatic start and stop function in hours, including the time
that the engine has been auto-stopped.
c. Number of automatic engine stops.
14
The menu shows the resettable statistics for the automatic start
and stop function.
a. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour,
including the time that the engine has been auto-stopped.
b. The time that the engine has been switched off by the
automatic start and stop function in minutes, including the time
that the engine has been auto-stopped.
c. Number of automatic engine stops.
5.6.5 Menu for services and settings

Description
Used for diagnostics, calibration and settings on the machine by
authorised personnel. Access code required.
On machines with bypass with code lock the menu is also used to
unlock the bypass.
014981
5.6.6 Menu for machine check

Menu for machine check, description
1 Select the menu for MACHINE CHECK with or and confirm
with .

220 5 Handling – Menu for machine check
2 The menu shows lamp checking. This function switches on all the
lights on the machine in order to facilitate daily inspection.
Switch on all the lights on the machine with . The tick in the box
indicates that the lights are switched on.
NOTE
Run the engine at idle in order to prevent discharge of the
batteries.
Select the next menu with or go back with . Leave the menu
with .
3 The menu shows reversing of cooling fans for the intercooler.

Change the cooling fans' blow direction . The tick in the box
indicates the fans' blow direction is reversed.
with .
4
The menu shows central lubrication. This menu activates the
central lubrication for extra lubrication or function check of the
central lubrication.
Activate the central lubrication's main units with . The tick in the
box indicates that a lubrication cycle is activated.
with .
5 The menu shows checking the scale. This menu reads the values
from the load detector's sensors and shows them individually. The
load is weighed regardless of boom position.
a. Shows load's weight in kilo. Accuracy is 1% of load capacity,
i.e. approx. +/-100 kg.
b. Shows distance from centre of front wheel to load centre in
metres.
c. Shows extension of boom in metres.
d. Shows boom angle in degrees.
with .

6 Inspection and maintenance 221
6 Inspection and
maintenance
General
This chapter describes:
• DAILY INSPECTION - performed by the operator.
Daily inspection describes the running inspection that significantly
contributes to making the machine a safe and reliable workplace.
• MAINTENANCE - performed by the operator.
Maintenance describes some simple maintenance actions.
• SERVICE - performed by trained service technician.
Service is performed according to a service schedule and by
service technicians. Service is described in the maintenance
manual.
It is the operator who is responsible for ensuring that the machine
comes in for service according to prescribed service intervals.
Procedures are described in the maintenance manual.
• ERROR CODE INFORMATION - read off by the operator.
Error code information is read off by the operator from the control
system's display in the cab. Depending on the type of error code, it
is handled by the operator or a service technician.
NOTE
All time information refers to operating time, that is, the time shown
by the hour meter on the panel.
CAUTION
Only spare parts approved by Cargotec may be used.
This is to maintain the machine's safety as well as to
meet warranty and service agreements!
Only use spare parts and fluids approved by Cargotec
to fulfil warranty terms.

222 6 Inspection and maintenance – Daily inspection
6.1 Daily inspection

General
Daily inspection of the machine is extremely important in order to
ensure that it is safe both for the operator and its surroundings.
Every operator should perform checks before a new work shift. In this
way, operators can avoid running defective machines with malfunctions
that have been generated or caused during an earlier work shift.
WARNING
inspection.
Instructions
Perform the following checks:
1. Visual inspection of the machine's exterior and engine
compartment. Pay attention to odours from fuel or electronic
equipment. Walk around the machine and check the following:
• That sensors for twistlocks and contact are clean and free of
grease, and that the contact pins for twistlocks can be moved
up and down easily. Note that a contact pin that binds in the
upper position may indicate contact, despite the frame not
being positioned against the container.
• Leakage from engine, fuel and AdBlue systems, transmission,
drive axle, steering cylinder, hydraulic hoses and hydraulic
cylinders.
DANGER
Residue from fuel, oils, grease or other flammable
materials on the engine or in the engine compartment
is a fire hazard.
Fire hazard!
Remove residue of flammable materials in the engine
compartment as soon as they are detected. Be extra
careful on hot surfaces such as exhaust systems,
manifolds or turbochargers. If leakage of oil, fuel or
coolant is detected, the reason should be investigated
and the fault corrected before starting the engine.
• Loose wheel nuts.

Following a wheel replacement, check-tightening of the bolted
joints is very important (after approx. 4-5 operating hours).
• Damage to rims.
• Uneven tyre wear - remove any objects that may penetrate the
tyres, e.g. glass, metal filings, etc.
• Any blisters or damage to the tyres - contact service
immediately to replace tyres that are blistered or damaged.
• Tyre pressure.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Daily inspection 223
• Cab with regards to damage and dirty windows, rear view

mirrors.
2. In cold weather:
• Check that wiper blades have not frozen to the windscreen.
WARNING
Attempting to manually move the wiper armswill
damage the wiper motor's gear or shaft.
Damage to the wiper motor's gear or shafts.
Never try to manually move the wiper arms.
• Remove snow and ice from air inlets and radiator grill.
• Antifreeze in washer fluid.
• Disconnect the auxiliary heater .
Electrical box for auxiliary heater is located by the cab steps
on the left side of the machine.
3. Check fluid levels for the following fluids in accordance with the
description, see 6.2 Maintenance, page 225. Top up, if necessary,
with the correct fluid:
• Hydraulic oil.
• Oil for brake system.
• Washer fluid - windows.
• Engine oil, see Engine oil, general, page 237.
• Transmission oil.
4. Check the engine:
• Check the engine's air filter indicator, also check and drain, if
necessary, the water separator under the fuel prefilter. For a
description, see Air filter engine, general, page 235 and Fuel
system, general, page 228.
5. Start the machine according to instructions and check:
• Instruments - warning lamps, indicators, any error codes.
• Fuel level - the gauge must not show empty tank.
• AdBlue– level - the gauge must not show empty tank.
Only applies to engine option Volvo TAD871VE.
Operating the machine without AdBlue leads to restricted
engine power output. In serious cases, a service technician
may need to reset the engine in order to regain full
performance.
• Lighting, direction indicators, signal, brake lights, warning
lights and reflectors, check function and rectify any damage.
All the lights on the machine can be switched on simultaneously
with the menu for machine check, see Menu for machine
check, description, page 219.
• Windscreen wipers.
• Check that the rear view mirrors are intact, clean and properly
adjusted.
6. Operate the machine slowly/carefully and check the following
functions:
• Brakes - check-brake at least three times.
• Steering - in both directions.
• Transmission - all gears - forward and reverse.
7. Run all functions with hydraulic cylinders (boom lift/lower/in/out,
spreading and side shift) to their end positions for lubrication of the
cylinder barrels and piston rods.

224 6 Inspection and maintenance – Daily inspection
8. Check the attachment's functions and that:

• The indicator lights for load handling are working.
• Check that the twistlocks are working. This is done by lifting
an empty container until the light "Contact" goes out. It should
not now be possible to release the twistlocks.
WARNING
Do not use the machine if the system for locking
containers does not work.
damage!
Use of the machine must be discontinued, and it has to
be taken to a service workshop for needed actions.
A. Contact pin
9. For central lubrication :

Make sure grease has not seeped out from the safety valve
(position A). This is a sign that the central lubrication is not working
properly.
10. Check the machine's operating hours - notify the
foreman/supervisor if the machine is close to a service interval.
11. Check if any error codes are active.
See 5.3 Error codes, page 100.
12. Make sure that AdBlue is drained from the hoses when the
machine is turned off. The AdBlue– pump can still be heard for
short time after the engine has been switched off.
A Safety valve The system voltage must not be cut with the battery disconnector
before the pump has stopped.
B Filler nipple
Only applies to certain engine options.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Maintenance 225
6.2 Maintenance
General
The following maintenance actions are described in this chapter:
– Cleanliness, general, page 226
– Fuel system, general, page 228
– Windscreen washer, general, page 233
– Wiper blades, general, page 234
– Air filter engine, general, page 235
– Cooling system, general, page 236
– Engine oil, general, page 237
– Transmission oil, general, page 238
– Oil, brake system, general, page 239
– Hydraulic system, general, page 240
– Tyres and rims, general, page 242
– Accumulators, general, page 245
– Central lubrication, general, page 246
– Battery and battery disconnector, general, page 247
– Fuses for electrical system, general, page 249
– Lighting, general, page 254
Safety during maintenance

Observe the following when maintenance work is to be performed:
• Always switch off the engine during service work. The only
exception is when service work requires engine power.
• Use stop blocks at the wheels.
• No work may be carried out on the machine without the right
knowledge and skills to do the work correctly. Maintenance
performed incorrectly may be dangerous.
• Always use a hard hat, protective glasses, gloves, work shoes and
other protective items as required by the work situation.
• Read all plates and instructions on the machine and in the
operator's manual before performing any maintenance. Each one
contains important information about handling and maintenance.
• Avoid spills when draining/filling oils, fuel and AdBlue. Use
reservoirs/tanks, pump, hose, etc. for safe handling. Oils, fuels
and AdBlue cause environmental damage. They should be taken
care of by an authorised company. AdBlue is also corrosive
and damages electrical wiring, etc. and must be rinsed away
immediately if spilt.
• Always drain the pressure from the accumulators before working
on the hydraulic system.

226 6 Inspection and maintenance – Cleanliness
Cab movement
The cab can be moved forward manually for better visibility and access
in the engine compartment.
Instructions
1 Select neutral gear with gear selector and multi-function lever.
2 Apply the parking brake.
3 Close the doors.
4 Remove the pin (position B) from the lock handle.
5 Open the lock handle (position C).
Loosen the lock handle on both sides.
6 Push cab forward.
DANGER
The cab is very heavy and the machine must not be
moved without first securing the cab.
Extreme danger! Risk of crushing!
Always make sure that the cab locks on both sides are
locked in their rear position before operating, and that
the locks are secured with the lock pins.
A. Position lock handle

B. Lock pin
C. Lock handle for securing cab
6.2.1 Cleanliness
Cleanliness, general
Dirt has a negative impact on performance. Experience shows that
clean machines have fewer malfunctions.
The machine should be washed regularly for optimal functionality.

Keep the following in mind when washing:
• Run the hydraulic cylinders to the inner positions.
• Use mild cleaning agents.
Use a degreaser if necessary. Scrub if necessary.
• Use a high-pressure washer, wide water jet.
CAUTION
High-pressure washing of sensitive
components may lead to short-circuiting and
cause malfunction.
Product damage!
Do not use a high-pressure washer on the
cab, radiator, battery compartment, electric
components, control units, connectors, cable
joints, cylinder seals, stub axles, axle seals and
chains.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Cleanliness 227
NOTE
After washing with de-greaser, the hydraulic cylinders should be run
in and out a few times to obtain satisfactory lubrication once again.
WARNING
hydrocarbons.
Low strength! Danger!
Check the surface layer of the roof window and
clean only with washer fluid or mild detergent. Rinse
thoroughly with lukewarm water afterwards. Replace a
damaged roof window that shows cracks or scratches
immediately!
CAUTION
Cleaning agents contain different solvents.
Health-hazardous and highly flammable.
Ensure good ventilation when cleaning the machine.
Avoid skin contact, use protective gloves. If you
get dizzy when using cleaning agents, get fresh air
immediately and contact a doctor. If the cleaning agent
has found its way into your eyes, rinse immediately
with lots of water and contact a doctor immediately.
CAUTION
Objects may shoot off when using compressed air for
cleaning.
Risk of injury.
Use protective goggles and protective gloves. Exercise
caution to avoid injury to yourself or those nearby.
For optimum functionality the machine should also be kept clean inside
the cab.
• Plastic material: Vacuum clean, brush/wipe with lightly moistened
rag. Use mild cleaning agent and always wipe down with a lightly
moistened rag and clean water.
• Textile material: Vacuum clean, brush/clean with e.g. furniture or
carpet cleaning agent in accordance with the instructions on the
packaging.

228 6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuel system
6.2.2 Fuel system

Fuel system, general
Fuel filling is located on the left-hand side of the machine.
NOTE
In order to prevent fuel and AdBlue being filled in the wrong tank,
the filler cap for fuel is black and for AdBlue it is blue.
NOTE
Make sure that the area around the tank cap is clean when
refuelling.
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and health hazardous.
Fire hazard! Health hazard!
Handle with great care and avoid all possible ignition
sources, for example, cigarettes, sparks. Avoid skin
contact, use protective gloves. In the event of skin
A. Fuel filler orifice contact and spills on clothes, wash the skin and
change clothes.
B. Only machines with Volvo TAD871VE
Filling AdBlue
CAUTION
The quality of the diesel affects the service life of the
engine.
Make sure that correct diesel quality is used.
Incorrect diesel quality will lead to after-treatment
system failure resulting in high repair costs.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuel system 229
IMPORTANT
If AdBlue is accidentally poured into the fuel tank this
can lead to the following:
• The engine will not run at full power or not at all.
• Injectors can be damaged.
• Corrosion may arise in the exhaust system between
the turbo and the after-treatment system.
• Expensive repairs.
If fuel is accidentally poured into the AdBlue tank this
can lead to the following:
• The after-treatment system can be seriously
damaged.
• The engine no longer satisfies emission
requirements.
• Expensive repairs.
Fuel
• Always refuel with diesel. For tank volume and fuel quality, see 9
Specifications, page 269.
• Never use additives in the diesel.
• In wintertime, try to fill up immediately after finished operation.
This prevents condensation in the fuel tank. Do not use
anti-condensation agents, for example, alcohol, in the fuel.
• Do not refuel when the engine is running.
• Make sure that the fuel nozzle is connected securely in the filler
pipe (to prevent spills and generation of static electricity).
• Clean around the filler pipe after refuelling and handle used rags,
wiped up fuel, etc. in an environmentally sound manner.

CAUTION
AdBlue can irritate with skin and eye contact and if
inhaled.
Health hazard!
Handle carefully and avoid skin contact, wear
protective gloves. In the event of any contact with
the skin and spillage on clothing, wash the skin with
large quantities of water and change contaminated
clothing and gloves. In the event of eye contact, rinse
thoroughly with water for several minutes and seek
medical advice if necessary. If inhaled, breathe fresh
air and seek medical advice if necessary.
CAUTION
AdBlue spilt on hot components evaporates quickly.
Irritating to the eyes and respiratory system.
Turn your face away. Vaporized AdBlue can act
corrosive to eyes and mucous membranes in the
throat. In the event of eye contact, rinse thoroughly
with water for several minutes and seek medical advice
if necessary. If inhaled, breathe fresh air and seek
medical advice if necessary.
IMPORTANT
Avoid spilling AdBlue on the ground and in
watercourses.
Spillage on the ground must be absorbed with sand or
other absorbent, non-combustible materials.
IMPORTANT
Never fill another AdBlue other than that specified in 9
Specifications.
Risk of damage to the after-treatment system!
Never start the engine if anything other than pure
AdBlue has been filled in the AdBlue– tank.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuel system 231
IMPORTANT
Avoid spilling AdBlue on the machine.
AdBlue is highly corrosive and harmful primarily to
wiring and electrical components.
Clean AdBlue from electrical wiring and components
immediately. If a connector has been exposed to
AdBlue solution then it must be replaced immediately
so that the AdBlue solution does not creep further into
the wiring. AdBlue creeps at a speed of 0.6 m/h in the
wiring. Cleaning with water and compressed air is not
sufficient due to AdBlue oxidising the metal itself.
AdBlue
• Always fill with pure AdBlue. For tank volume and AdBlue quality,
see 9 Specifications, page 269.
• Never use additives in the AdBlue.
• In wintertime, try to fill up immediately after finished operation. This
prevents condensation in the AdBlue tank.
• Do not refuel when the engine is running.
Switch off the engine and wait 2 minutes before refilling AdBlue.
When the engine is switched off AdBlue is pumped back into the
tank. If the engine is not switched off before refilling then there
is a risk of overfilling and leakage, with damage to the machine
and the environment as a result when the engine is switched off
the next time.
• Make sure the nozzle for AdBlue is correctly fitted to the filler pipe.
We recommend that filling equipment with automatic shut-off is
always used in order to avoid overfilling.
• Clean around the filler pipe after refuelling and handle used rags,
wiped up fuel, etc. in an environmentally sound manner.

Fuel prefilter, instructions
NOTE
The water separator should be drained of water when necessary
or at least every 50 operating hours.
DANGER
The fuel is highly flammable.
Fire hazard! Extreme danger!
Make sure that open flames, sparks, or red-hot/glowing
objects have been extinguished before starting work
on or near the fuel system. Do not smoke near the
machine during work on the fuel system.
1 Turn off the engine and the main system voltage with the battery
disconnector.
2 Position a receptacle under the filter.
3 Drain the water from the filter.
017490
Use your hand to open the drain valve. Turn the valve
anticlockwise until the valve drops down and draining starts, drain
Draining, fuel prefilter until clear fuel is visible. When closing the valve, turn clockwise
and only tighten the cock by hand.
CAUTION
When closing, do not turn too hard. Overtightening
may damage the threads.
WARNING
Fuel on hands.
Rash and irritation.
Avoid skin contact with the fuel, use gloves.
4 Remove the collection container. Handle the fuel as

environmentally hazardous and fire hazardous waste.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Windscreen washer 233
Fuel system, bleeding

The fuel system must be bled, e.g. after replacing the fuel filter, if the
fuel is run empty and after long periods of downtime.
1 Machine in service position, see 7.3 Service position, page 263.
2 Remove the protective plug from the bleed nipple (position 1).
3 Open the bleed nipple two turns and connect a transparent
fuel-resistant hose to the bleed nipple. Route the open end of the
hose into a receptacle.
4 Bleed the fuel system by pumping with the hand pump (position 2)
until fuel free of air emerges from the bleed hose.
5 Close the bleed nipple while fuel is flowing out of the hose.
6 Wait for 15 seconds, then repeat Steps 4 – 5.
7 Remove the hose and tighten the bleed nipple by 3.5 Nm.
8 Refit the protective plug on the bleed nipple.
9 Start the engine and allow it to idle for approximately 5 minutes
before increasing the speed.
1. Bleed nipple
2. Hand pump
6.2.3 Windscreen washer

Windscreen washer, general
CAUTION
hydrocarbons.
The strength of the roof window may be affected!
Only use clean water with an antifreeze agent, e.g.
antifreeze fluid.
The washer fluid reservoir (position A) is located to the left of the cab's
front edge.
Low washer fluid level is indicated with the event menu, see Event
menu low washer fluid level, description, page 85.
A. Washer fluid reservoir Instructions

1. Check the level in the reservoir. Top up with washer fluid as
required. For volume, see 9 Specifications, page 269.
2. Add anti-freeze. Select a suitable concentration (dilution
water/anti-freeze fluid) according to the prevailing outdoor
temperatures.

234 6 Inspection and maintenance – Wiper blades
6.2.4 Wiper blades

Wiper blades, general
Instructions
WARNING
Attempting to manually move the wiper armswill
damage the wiper motor's gear or shaft.
Damage to the wiper motor's gear or shafts.
Never try to manually move the wiper arms.
NOTE
Wiper blades, separate windscreen and roof wipers
Check the condition of the wiper blades; replace damaged wiper blades
in order to reduce the risk of damage to the windows.
Instructions
• Roof wiper: Carefully lift the wiper blade's locking arm and detach
the washer hose from the blade's nozzle. Replace the wiper blade,
lock in the wiper blade and refit the washer hose.
NOTE
If the wiper arm is lifted too much then it may be damaged and
wiper blade contact may be affected.
• Rear wiper: Lift the wiper arm, press in the wiper blade's locking
catch (position B) and replace the wiper blade. Check that the
wiper blade is locked in the correct position.
• Windscreen wipers: Undo the wiper blade's attaching bolt (position
C). Carefully lift the wiper arm and replace the wiper blade. Fit
the attaching bolt (position C).
Wiper blades, combined windscreen and roof wipers NOTE

If the wiper arm is lifted too much then it may be damaged and
wiper blade contact may be affected.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Air filter, engine 235
6.2.5 Air filter, engine

Air filter engine, general
Instructions
NOTE
Poorly filtered induction air can very quickly result in serious engine
damage.
The filter is changed by the service technician during scheduled

inspection and service. When the machine is used in very dusty air, the
filter may be clogged after a relatively short time.
In the induction system, between the engine and air filter (A), there's an
indicator (B) which shows red when the air filter is clogged.
The air filter has a dust reservoir (position C) which is normally emptied
during operation by vibration in the induction system. It can also be
emptied manually by shaking it.
Instructions
• Check the indicator regularly and contact service as soon as the
indicator shows a red signal.
• The indicator can be reset to zero.
A. Position for air filter reservoir

B. Indicator for change
C. Dust reservoir

236 6 Inspection and maintenance – Cooling system
6.2.6 Cooling system

Cooling system, general
Coolant is filled in the system's expansion tank (position B). The coolant
level with a cold engine must be visible in the sight glass (position C)
on the expansion tank.
Low coolant level is indicated via the event menu, see Event menu low
coolant level engine, description, page 89.
WARNING
Low coolant level may result in serious engine damage.
Never operate an engine with low coolant level.
High coolant temperature is indicated via the event menu, see Event
menu engine coolant temperature, description, page 80.
A. Position of the coolant container (expansion
tank) Instructions
B. Filling point
C. Sight glass
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurised when the coolant is
hot. Steam or hot coolant may spray out.
Risk of scalding and burn injuries and incorrect
coolant level.
Never open the filler cap when the coolant temperature
is higher than the ambient temperature. Always wait
until the coolant has fully cooled down before checking
the level. Incorrect coolant level may cause engine
damage.
WARNING
Glycol and anti-corrosion agents are hazardous to
health.
Health hazard!
Handle with care. Avoid skin contact. Wear protective
glasses and protective gloves. In the event of skin
contact, wash the skin.
CAUTION
Use approved coolant.
Risk of engine damage and invalidated warranty if
unapproved coolant is used.
Only use coolant approved by the engine supplier
when changing and topping up the coolant.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Engine oil 237
• Allow the coolant to cool to the ambient temperature, use the

operating menus to check the coolant level.
• Check the coolant level in the expansion tank. Fill with coolant
approved by the engine supplier as required. For volume, see 9
Specifications, page 269.
6.2.7 Engine oil

Engine oil, general
Instructions
WARNING
protective gloves.
The engine's oil filler pipe (position B) and oil dipstick (position C) are
located under the service cover in front of the cab on the machine's
left-hand side.
Instructions
• Check on the dipstick (position C). Check the oil level when the
engine is warm. The dipstick has a marked area where the oil level
should be. Optimum oil level is in the centre of the area.
NOTE
The oil dipstick is long on certain machines. Wear gloves.
A. Position for filling point • Top up as required with new engine oil (position B). For volume
and quality, see 9 Specifications, page 269.
B. Oil filler pipe
Top up – wait awhile – check.
C. Oil dipstick (yellow)
NOTE
Work carefully when filling engine oil to prevent other fluids or
particles from contaminating the oil. Other fluids or particles in the
engine oil means a risk of engine damage.

238 6 Inspection and maintenance – Transmission oil
6.2.8 Transmission oil

Transmission oil, general
WARNING
protective gloves.
The transmission's oil filler pipe and oil dipstick (position B) are located
under the service cover in front of the cab.
Instructions
• Check the oil level.
Check the oil level with the engine idling and the transmission in
neutral position and at operating temperature (approx. 90 °C in
the display).
The oil dipstick has two markings, MAX and MIN, the oil level
should be between these markings.
• Wipe off the oil dipstick before checking.
NOTE
The oil dipstick is long. Wear gloves.
• Top up as required with new transmission oil (position B). For

volume and quality, see 9 Specifications, page 269).
It is recommended to fill the oil when the transmission is at
operating temperature. Top up – wait awhile – check on the
dipstick.
NOTE
Work carefully when filling transmission oil to prevent other fluids or
transmission oil means a risk of transmission damage.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Oil, brake system 239
6.2.9 Oil, brake system

Oil, brake system, general
Instructions
WARNING
protective gloves.
The tank for the brake system is located on the machine's left side.
Instructions
• Check the oil level (position E).
The level should be in the middle of the sight glass.
• Top up as required with new oil (position C). For volume and
quality, see 9 Specifications, page 269).
• Check that the oil cooler (position B) is not clogged. Clean as
needed.
A. Oil tank for brake system NOTE

B. Oil cooler Work carefully when filling brake oil to prevent other fluids or
C. Filling point brake oil means a risk of damage to the brake system.
D. Breather filter
E. Sight glass oil tank

240 6 Inspection and maintenance – Hydraulic system
6.2.10 Hydraulic system

Hydraulic system, general
Instructions
WARNING
protective gloves.
The hydraulic oil tank is located on the machine's right-hand side.

Instructions
• Check the oil level (position E). All hydraulic pistons should be in
retracted position (pushed in).
The level should be at the top of the sight glass.
• Top up as required with new oil (position F). For volume and quality,
see 9 Specifications, page 269.
A. Oil cooler
NOTE
B. Hydraulic tank
Work carefully when filling engine oil to prevent other fluids or
C. Cleaning filter hydraulic oil particles from contaminating the oil. Other fluids or particles in the
D. Filling point, hydraulic oil tank (reserve) engine oil involve a risk of damage to the brake system or working
hydraulics.
E. Sight glass, hydraulic oil tank
F. Filling point, hydraulic oil tank
G. Breather filter

6 Inspection and maintenance – Hydraulic system 241
Emergency lowering of boom
DANGER
Manual operation entails risks!
Risk of crushing! Risk of roll-over! Extreme danger!
Avoid manual lowering. If manual lowering cannot be
avoided, work very carefully.
As long as there is servo pressure in the hydraulic system, as well as

battery voltage, the boom can be lowered using the control lever in the
cab. In the event that hydraulic functions stop working, emergency
lowering can take place with manual control of the valves.
NOTE
Operate the boom with continuous control of the valves during the
whole boom movement (to use the remaining servo pressure). In
the event of repeated valve operation, the servo pressure is lost
and no functions can be performed.
Instructions
Valve block lift cylinder 1. Hold the emergency lowering valve (B) in its position using an Allen
A. Lock nut key and loosen the lock nut (B).
B. Emergency lowering valve 2. Two people, one on the right and one on the left-hand side of the
machine, position themselves to open the emergency lowering
valve for each respective lift cylinder (position B).
3. Turn the emergency lowering valve carefully anticlockwise to open
the valve (area C). This releases the pressure in the lift cylinders.
NOTE
Do this to both lift cylinders simultaneously.
4. The boom is lowered slowly.

5. When lowering is complete, close both of the emergency lowering
valves (B), and lock them with the lock nuts (A).

242 6 Inspection and maintenance – Tyres and rims
6.2.11 Tyres and rims

Tyres and rims, general
DANGER
Changing tyres is high-risk work.
Extreme danger!
Let service personnel change tyres, they have the
competence and authority to handle tyres!
DANGER
Penetrating objects such as crushed glass, pieces of
wood, metal shavings, etc. and mechanical defects,
such as uneven brake wear, can cause tyre damage.
Risk of tyre explosion! Extreme danger!
Check the tyres at regular intervals for external
damage and tyre pressure.
WARNING
Check-tighten the wheel nuts on a new wheel after 4-5
operating hours.
damage!
Tighten bolted joints crosswise. Contact a service
technician as required.
CAUTION
Spare and replacement tyres should be of brand
names approved by Cargotec.
Risk of overloaded tyres!
Use tyres approved by Cargotec.
IMPORTANT
Wheels, tyres and rims are dimensioned and selected
for each machine type so that maximum wheel loads
and travel speeds are not exceeded. For this reason it
is not permitted to change tyre dimension, tyre make,
tyre type, rim type, or rim make without approval from
Cargotec.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Tyres and rims 243
Changing wheel:
Changing wheels, see Maintenance manual.
DANGER
When changing tyres, deflate first.
Deflate tyres by loosening and removing the valve.
DANGER
Rim damage makes wheel handling extremely
dangerous!
Let service personnel change tyres, they have the
competence and authority to handle tyres!
CAUTION
Remove the sensors for tyre pressure monitoring
before the wheels are removed.
Risk of product damage.
The sensors for tyre pressure monitoring are fitted on
the valves and may be damaged when the tyres are
handled.

244 6 Inspection and maintenance – Tyres and rims
Inflating tyres
Care of compressor for inflating tyres:
• An air filter with water separator should be installed in the line from
the compressor used for inflating tyres. The water filter minimises
the risk of corrosion on wheel rims.
• Drain the water separator regularly.
DANGER
Never stand in front of a tyre when inflating! Do
not exceed prescribed air pressure, which must be
checked at ambient temperature. When changing
tyre or rim version, another tyre pressure may apply,
contact Cargotec. The plate for tyre air pressure
must be replaced with a plate with the applicable tyre
pressure!
004738
Extreme danger!
Always follow instructions for inflating tyres to avoid
serious accidents.
Instructions
1 Instructions
2 3
1. Before inflating, make sure that the rim's lock ring is in the correct
position.
NOTE
If the tyre has been completely deflated, the rim must be dismantled
and checked for damage. Let service personnel change tyres, they
004873
have the competence and authority to handle tyres!
1. Lock ring 2. On machines with tyre pressure monitoring.
2. Rim edge Only remove one sensor at a time in order to avoid mixing them
up. Sensor locations are programmed into the monitoring system;
3. Tapered rim contact a service technician for reprogramming.
3. Connect the compressor with a locking air-chuck to the nipple on
the tyre.
4. Stand at an angle behind the tyre and remain there until inflating
has been completed. This is to avoid being hit by rim parts in the
event of an explosion.
5. Inflate the tyre to the prescribed pressure, see chapter 9
Specifications. When changing tyre or rim version, another tyre
pressure may apply, contact Cargotec.
6. On machines with tyre pressure monitoring.
Refit the sensor for tyre pressure monitoring.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Checking accumulators 245
6.2.12 Checking accumulators

Accumulators, general
Instructions
The function of the accumulators (position A) is to maintain even brake

pressure and also to maintain brake pressure, and thus braking action,
a short time after eventual loss of hydraulic pressure.
The accumulators are precharged with nitrogen gas.

Instructions
Check for leakage according to the following points if the warning lamp
for low brake pressure (position 33) lights up:
1. Start the engine and let it run until the accumulators are filled.
Warning lamp for low brake pressure (position 33) goes off.
2. Stop the engine and then turn the start key to position I.
3. Press down the brake pedal with long pumping brake strokes, with
a slight delay between each braking action.
4. It should be possible to brake at least eight times before the light
for low brake pressure lights up.
5. Start the engine, let the accumulators charge and repeat the test
A. Accumulators for brake system
a couple of times.
If it is not possible to brake eight times before the warning lamp for
low brake pressure lights up, there is a defect in the accumulators.
Contact service immediately for troubleshooting and action.
WARNING
The machine's hydraulic system includes accumulators
with high pressure.
Always exercise extreme caution when working
with the hydraulic system and avoid unnecessarily
remaining close to hydraulic components or hoses.
The accumulators must be drained prior to work in the
hydraulic system (see Maintenance manual).

246 6 Inspection and maintenance – Central lubrication
6.2.13 Central lubrication

Central lubrication, general
Central lubrication (which replaces most of the manual lubrication)

consists of one or two pump units, one on the frame and one on the
attachment that lubricates selected lubrication points. The lubricant
quantity can be adjusted according to requirements, contact Cargotec
Service.
NOTE
Cleanliness when performing work on the central lubrication system
is extremely important. Dirt and debris can cause disturbances
in the system. Naphtha or light petroleum can be used to clean
the system. Do not use e.g. Tri or other organic solvents such as
A. Safety valve alcohol, methanol, acetone or the like.
B. Filler nipple
Instructions
• Maintenance for central lubrication is the filling of lubricant and
checking that all connected lubrication points receive sufficient
lubricant.
• Fill the reservoir up to the "Max" mark through the filler nipple
(position B).
Lubricating grease must be clean from contaminants and must not
change consistency as it ages.
• If the reservoir has become completely empty and is then filled, the
pump may need to be operated for longer in order to provide all the
lubrication points with a sufficient amount of lubricant.
Operate the pump manually with the menu for machine check, see
Menu for machine check, description, page 219.
• The quantity of grease supplied to the lubrication points can be set
via the machine's menus, see the Workshop manual.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Battery and battery disconnector 247
6.2.14 Battery and battery disconnector

Battery and battery disconnector, general
WARNING
Short-circuiting of battery.
Risk of explosion! Fire hazard! Risk of personal injury!
The battery's terminals must not be connected to each
other or to common grounding point (frame).
CAUTION
Always turn off the system voltage at the end of your
shift, when working on the electrical system and when
welding on the machine.
Danger!
Turn off the system voltage with the battery
disconnector. After the engine is turned off, wait a
while before switching off the system voltage. The
A. Battery disconnector control system for the diesel engine and transmission
performs actions, depending on the model, up to two
B. Battery cover
minutes after the engine is turned off.
The electrical system works with a system voltage of 24 Volt (DC). The
power source consists of two series-connected 12 Volt (DC) batteries
which are charged by an AC alternator with rectifier. The negative
terminal is connected to the body.
The plus terminal is connected to a battery disconnector (position A).
The batteries are located inside of a cover (position B) behind the steps
on the machine's left-hand side.

248 6 Inspection and maintenance – Battery and battery disconnector
Starting with booster battery
WARNING
Handle batteries and connectors with great care during
charging and boosting (jump starting). Do not mix
up the battery terminals! Follow the instructions for
starting with a booster battery!
Danger of short circuit! Warning - risk of hydrogen gas
forming! Danger of sparks and fire! Hydrogen gas is
very explosive!
Batteries must always be equipped with covers over
terminals and connections. Connect positive terminals
first. Then connect the negative terminals in order to
avoid sparks that could ignite the hydrogen gas.
1 Switch off the system voltage with the battery disconnector

(position A).
2 Open the battery cover on the machine's left-hand side.
3 Check that the engine on the machine with booster batteries is
switched off.
4 Check that the booster batteries are connected in series so that
they supply 24 VDC. Do not disconnect the normal cables to the
machine's batteries.
5 Connect in the following order:
a. The red booster cable (+) to the discharged batteries' positive
terminal.
b. The red booster cable (+) to the booster batteries' positive
terminal.
c. The black booster cable (-) to the booster batteries' negative
terminal.
d. The black booster cable (-) to a point some distance from the
discharged batteries, e.g. by the negative cable's connection to
the frame or directly to the engine block.
6 Start the machine containing the booster batteries.
7 Make the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
8 Try to start the engine and then run the engine at increased idling
speed for approx. 10 minutes to charge the batteries.
Do not move the connections during the start attempt - risk of
sparks. Do not lean over any of the batteries.
9 Disconnect the cables in the reverse order as to when connecting
them. One cable at a time! Batteries must always be equipped
with covers over terminals and connections.
As an option, the machine can be equipped with a booster battery start

(auxiliary start) connection of the NATO type.
1 Connect the jumper cable to donor vehicle's booster battery start
(auxiliary start) connection. The auxiliary vehicle's engine must
be switched off.
2 Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the machine's
booster battery start (auxiliary start) connection.
3 Check that the machine's battery disconnector is in the ON
position.
4 Start the auxiliary vehicle and run the engine at high idle for
approx. 5 minutes.
5 Try to start the machine. If the machine does not start, contact
service.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuses for electrical system 249
6 When the machine has started, let the auxiliary vehicle idle.
7 Remove the jumper cable from the machine's booster battery start
(auxiliary start) connection and then from the auxiliary vehicle's
booster battery start (auxiliary start) connection.
6.2.15 Fuses for electrical system

Fuses for electrical system, general
The machine's electrical system is fuse-protected in three levels:
• Main fuses
• Distribution fuses
• Fuses
The machine's electrical system is also divided into two electrical

power circuits:
• Battery voltage, i.e. the voltage output in the machine when the
battery disconnector is in position I.
• Ignition voltage, i.e. the voltage output in the machine when the
ignition key lock is in position I provided the battery disconnector
is in position I.
CAUTION
Never use fuses with too high ampere rating.
Risk of cable damage or cable fire!
Follow instructions on the fuse plate for fuse type and
ampere rating.
Fuses on frame
A. Fuses in electronic box cab, F9968
B. Distribution fuses, F9952-2,
C. Distribution fuses, F9954-1
D. Fuses in the battery box, F9952-1
E. Fuses in electronic box frame, F9958

250 6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuses for electrical system
Main fuses
Main fuses
The machine's main fuses are located inside the battery cover for the
batteries on the left-hand side of the machine.
Table Main fuses F9952-1
Fuse number / Size Functions

1 / 100 A Fuses everything that is disconnected
with the main switch.
2 / 50 A Fuses everything that is not
disconnected with the main switch.
Instructions
1. Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
The engine must be switched off.
See Battery and battery disconnector, general, page 247.
2. Open the battery cover.
3. Check and change main fuses when necessary.
Main fuse in the battery compartment on the frame

Distribution fuses
Distribution fuses
The machine's distribution fuses are located in the electronic box on
the left-hand side of the machine, rear boom mounting and at the front
of the boom.
Table Distribution fuses, ignition voltage F9954-1
Fuse number /
Size Functions
1 / 50 A Frame, Fuse holder (F9958-BK)
2 / 50 A Cab, Fuse holder (F9968-BK and GN),
Control unit KCU (D7901)
3 / 50 A Control unit KFU (D7971) and Control unit
KFU-2 (D7972)
4 / 50 A Control unit KAU (D7911)
Table Distribution fuses, battery voltage F9952-2
Fuse number /
Size Functions
1 / 50 A Frame, Fuse holder (F9958-RD)
2 / 50 A Cab, Fuse holder (F9968-RD)
Distribution fuses in electronic box frame Table Connection block voltage feed attachment X401 and X500
Fuse number /
Size Functions
1 / 50 A Voltage feed attachment
Red or white cable = +24 V from
F9954-1:4b.
2 / 50 A Voltage feed attachment
Black or brown cable = chassis connection.
Instructions
2. Remove the cover from the electronic box on the frame.
3. Remove the plastic cover.
4. Check and change main fuses when necessary.
The fuse plate gives information about each fuse.

252 6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuses for electrical system
Fuses
Fuses
The machine's fuses are located in the electronic box in the cab (F9968)
and in the electronic box on the left-hand side of the machine (F9958).
Table Fuses battery voltage frame F9958-RD
Fuse number / Functions

Size
RD1 / 15/10 A Control unit engine (D7940), Volvo 15 A /
Cummins 10 A
Control unit engine (D7940)
RD2 / 30/10 A Power supply after-treatment system Volvo
30 A
RD3 / - -
RD4 / - -
RD5 / - -
RD6 / 5 A Control unit, transmission (D7930)

RD7 / 5 A Tyre pressure monitoring
RD8 / 30 A -
Table Fuses ignition voltage frame F9958-BK

Size
BK1 / - -
BK2 / - -
Fuses in electronic box frame, F9958 BK3 / 5 A Start interlock
BK4 / - -
BK5 / - -
BK6 / 5 A Control unit, transmission (D7930)

BK7 / - -
BK8 / 5/15 A Horn 5A, loud horn 15 A
Table Fuses options frame F9958-GN

Size
GN1 / - -
GN2 / - -
GN3 / - -
GN4 / - -
GN5 / 10 A Constant-loading functions

GN6 / 20 A Eberspächer (diesel heater)
GN7 / 10 A Electric main switch
Fire extinguishing system
GN8 / 5 A Engine compartment lighting

Fuses battery voltage cab F9968 RD
Table Fuses battery voltage cab F9968 RD

Size
RD1 / 5 A Start up, alcolock, start interlock
RD2 / 15 A Control unit KCU (D7901)
RD3 / - -
RD4 / 5 A Radio
RD5 / 10 A Service, RMI
RD6 / 10 A Customer-specific equipment
RD7 / - -
RD8 / 10 A -
Table Fuses ignition voltage cab F9968 BK

Size
BK1 / 10 A Control unit KPU (D7902), Control unit KID
(D7950), travel direction selector control
lever, inhibitor alcolock, TelliQ (Insight)
BK2 / 10 A Service, RMI , distance warning system
back-up camera
BK3 / 10 A Monitor, back-up camera
BK4 / 5 A Radio
BK5 / 25 A Seat heating, seat belt, ventilation control
driver's seat
BK6 / 10 A 24 V socket cab, electrically operated
mirrors , customer-specific equipment
BK7 / 15 A Work lights
BK8 / 10 A Searchlight
Fuses in electronic box cab, F9968
Table Fuses options cab F9968 GN

Size
GN1 / 25 A Heated rear window
GN2 / 10 A Double windscreen wipers front
GN3 / 10 A Voltage converter 12/24 VDC
GN4 / - -
GN5 / - -
GN6 / - -
GN7 / 20 A Inverter 230 V

GN8 / 10 A Compressor, air suspension driver's seat
, ventilation feed driver's seat

254 6 Inspection and maintenance – Lighting
Instructions
2. Remove the cover on the electronic box on the frame or in the cab.
3. Remove the plastic cover.
4. Check and change fuses when necessary.
The fuse plate gives information about each fuse.
6.2.16 Lighting
Lighting, general
It is important to use the right type of bulb for each respective lighting
point, see 9 Specifications, page 269.
Light bulbs can be changed for the following:

• Interior lighting
• Headlight with bulb (for high/low beam)
Headlights, work lights, direction indicators front, position lights,

combination lamp cluster rear (rear light, brake light & direction
indicator) are complete fittings and are replaced complete.
On machines with headlights with high and low beam, the bulb
can be replaced.
Lamp housing, front and rear

A. Position light
B. Direction indicator, front
C. Headlights
D. Back-up light
E. Brake and tail light
F. Direction indicator, rear

6 Inspection and maintenance – Service 255
6.3 Service
General
It's very important that inspections and service are performed at the
recommended intervals.
Service is performed by Cargotec, or by service technicians authorised

by Cargotec.
CAUTION
Service interval must be followed.
This is to maintain the machine's safety as well as to
meet warranty and service agreements!
Use spare parts and fluids approved by Cargotec to
fulfil warranty terms.
Service intervals and actions are described in the maintenance manual.
CAUTION
Undo the connectors from the control units.
Risk of damage to the control units!
When welding on the machine, all control units shall
be disconnected to prevent damage.

256 6 Inspection and maintenance – Service
WARNING
For safety reasons, the following spare parts may only
be replaced with genuine spare parts:
• Drive axle
• Brake valve
• Accumulator charging valve
• Accumulator
• Valve for mini-wheel/joystick steering
• Steering valve (Orbitrol)
• Control valve steering incl. priority valve
• Steering axle
• Steering cylinder
• Steering spindle
• Hub
• Rim
• Lift boom
• Lift cylinder
• Valve block lift cylinder
• Extension cylinder
• Valve block extension cylinder
• Rotation motor unit
• Tilt cylinder
• Twistlocks
• Attachment assembly
• Lifting ears
• Control breaker (for hydraulic function)
• Emergency switch
• Cab
• Frame
• All control units

7 Transporting the machine 257
7 Transporting the machine

Safety
DANGER
The machine must be firmly secured for transport! The
machine is heavy and can cause extensive damage in
the event of a fall and similar.
damage!
Follow the instructions in order to secure the machine
during transport.
WARNING
Cab doors must always be closed when operating.
Risk of personal injury and crushing in the event of
roll-over and tipping!
Always close the doors during the work shift.

258 7 Transporting the machine – Towing
7.1 Towing
General
DANGER
The machine cannot be operated or braked if the
hydraulic pressure is lost, e.g., if the engine is off.
Rolling machine! Extreme danger!
If possible, tow with maintained hydraulic pressure.
If it's not possible to have the engine running when
towing, a tow bar must be used! Only tow for short
distances!
CAUTION
Do not try to start the machine by towing.
Causes serious damage to the transmission!
Start the engine according to instructions in the
operator's manual.
Before taking actions and after finished towing, the parking brake
must be applied and the wheels blocked to prevent the machine from
starting to roll.
Extreme care must be observed during towing work to avoid personal

injuries.
When towing, keep in mind:

• The towing vehicle should be heavier than the vehicle in tow.
• If possible when towing, the engine should be running in order for
brakes and steering to function.
When the engine is switched off, there is no hydraulic pressure for
the steering function and thus the machine's steering function is
severely limited. In addition, transmission lubrication is insufficient.
• The brakes function as long as there is pressure in the
accumulator/accumulators, then the service brake stops
functioning and the parking brake is applied automatically. If it is
necessary to move/tow the machine after that, the parking brake
must be released mechanically, see section 7.1.1 Mechanical
release of parking brake.
• If it is necessary to tow the machine, the propeller shaft must be
released from both transmission and drive axle.
• Only tow for very short distances.

7 Transporting the machine – Mechanical release of parking brake 259
7.1.1 Mechanical release of parking brake

Description
The parking brake is applied automatically by a forceful spring in the
brake cylinder if the pressure in the hydraulic accumulator should drop
below a certain level.
If the machine has to be moved (towed) without sufficient pressure

in the hydraulic accumulator, the parking brake must be released
mechanically (manually).
DANGER
Before starting to work with the parking brake, make
sure that the machine cannot move when the braking
action is released.
Rolling machine! Extreme danger!
Block the wheels to avoid unwanted rolling of the
machine.
CAUTION
The parking brake has high spring force. If the brakes
are opened incorrectly, parts may detach and fly off
with great force.
Follow the instructions.
The parking brake is a disc brake with two brake calipers on the drive
axle's input shaft.
1 Remove the protective cover from the brake caliper (position A).
2 Grip the adjusting screw (position C) and loosen the lock nut
(position B).
3 Note the position of the adjusting screw (position C), for example,
by counting rotations when it is turned.
4 Turn the adjusting screw (position C) until the brake pads release
from the brake disc.
NOTE
If the parking brake has been released mechanically, the parking
brake must always be restored in order to give the machine
5 Restore the parking brake function by turning the adjusting screw

to the same position as in step 3.
Send the machine for service as soon as possible for checking and
adjustment of the parking brake.
6 Refit protective cover on the caliper.
A. Protective cover
B. Lock nut
C. Adjusting screw

260 7 Transporting the machine – Lifting and transporting the machine
7.2 Lifting and transporting the

machine
General
When lifting and transporting the machine, follow the governing safety
regulations.
DANGER
High demands are made of the lifting and transport
equipment, e.g. lifting chains, hooks, etc.
Extreme danger!
Check the equipment and its capacity, lifting slings on
the machine as well as lashing points on the transport
vehicle and machine.
DANGER
Overload of load equipment.
Extreme danger!
Lifting equipment must be dimensioned for the load.
Never walk under hanging loads.
Transport of machine on public roads takes place in accordance with

the following:
1 Secure the machine for transport on, e.g. a trailer. Note the
machine's weight, see machine plate.
Position the machine on the transport. See Lashing down for
transport, page 261.
2 Unload the machine from the transport. See Unloading the
machine, page 262.

7 Transporting the machine – Lifting machine 261
7.2.1 Lifting machine

Instructions
The machine shall be lifted as follows:
1 Lay two lifting slings in both front lifting eyes on the frame.
2 Lay two lifting slings in both rear lifting eyes on the frame (at the
boom mounting).
3 The lifting device must be adapted so that the lifting point runs
through the machine's centre of gravity.
017865
7.2.2 Transporting the machine

Lashing down for transport
The machine must be transported on a trailer that is wide enough to
support the drive axle's inner wheel.
1 Drive the machine up onto the trailer.
2 Turn the attachment so that it points in the machine's longitudinal
direction.
Fully lower the boom and retract the extension as far as possible.
3 Apply parking brake.
4 Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
5 Secure the front section of the machine adequately in the front of
the body and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.
Cross the chains when securing for optimal stability.
Lashing down the machine, front

262 7 Transporting the machine – Transporting the machine
6 Secure the rear section of the machine adequately in the rear of

the body and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.
7 Fold in the rear view mirrors and remove protruding parts, such as
the rotating beacon, in order to prevent damage during transport.
Lashing down the machine, rear
Unloading the machine

1 Remove the load safety catch from the machine.
2 Extend and adjust the rear view mirrors, and reset protruding parts,
such as the revolving beacon, that were removed during transport.
3 Drive the machine carefully off the trailer.

7 Transporting the machine – Service position 263
7.3 Service position

General
Service position is used for service, maintenance and other situations
when the machine needs to be secured.
Service position entails:

• The machine is parked, i.e. parking brake applied.
• Boom fully retracted and lowered to horizontal position.
• Engine off.
• System voltage switched off with battery disconnector.
Machine with fully retracted and lowered boom

264 7 Transporting the machine – Long-term storage
7.4 Long-term storage

General
Short-term storage is storage up to 4 weeks.
Long-term storage is storage for more than 4 weeks.
Short-term storage
Prepare for short-term storage
1 Wash the outside of the machine.
2 Perform the daily inspection, see 6.1 Daily inspection, page 222.
3 Check that the engine covers are intact and fitted correctly.
4 Park the machine in service position, see 7.3 Service position,
page 263.
5 Depressurise the brake and hydraulic systems, see Maintenance
manual.
6 Check the coolant level and the coolant's freezing point, see
Maintenance manual.
7 Close the cab windows and doors.
8 Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector, see
Battery and battery disconnector, general, page 247.
9 Disconnect the cables from the battery and trickle charge the
battery during the entire storage period.
NOTE
Since Insight draws a little current even when the battery voltage
is switched off using the battery disconnector, the battery cables
should be disconnected.
If very low temperatures are expected during the storage period,

remove the batteries and store them in a warmer location.
Reset after short-term storage
1 Connect the battery cables to the battery.
2 Close the valves that were opened to drain the pressure in the
hydraulic system, see Maintenance manual.
4 Start the engine and allow it to idle for 3 to 5 minutes.

7 Transporting the machine – Long-term storage 265
Long-term storage
General
NOTE
Kalmar recommends storing the machine in a dry and protected
area, preferably indoors.
Prepare for long-term storage
NOTE
If the machine is stored in long-term storage without being
prepared for it, there is a great risk of extensive damage to
machine and engine.
Always complete all measures for long-term storage in
accordance with the instructions from Kalmar and the engine
supplier.
1 Wash the machine externally and clean inside the cab.

2 Park the machine in service position, see 7.3 Service position,
page 263.
4 Fill the fuel tank to full in order to avoid condensation, see Fuel
system, general, page 228.
5 Drain the AdBlue tank.
6 Depressurise the brake and hydraulic systems, see Maintenance
manual.
7 Clean the piston rod surfaces that are exposed. Treat with oil or
grease.
8 Repair any damage from leaks, see Maintenance manual.
9 Check the coolant level and the coolant's freezing point, see
Maintenance manual.
10 Cover the exhaust outlet and air intake.
11 Close the cab windows and doors.
12 Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector, see
Battery and battery disconnector, general, page 247.
13 Prepare the engine for long-term storage, adapted according
to the intended storage time, in accordance with the engine
manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE
Follow the engine manufacturer's instructions carefully. In the
event of any doubt, contact Kalmar.

266 7 Transporting the machine – Long-term storage
14 Drain and fill with new oil in the transmission and axles, see
Maintenance manual.
NOTE
If the machine has only operated for a short time since the last
scheduled oil change for the transmission and axles, skip this
step.
15 Check that the engine covers are intact and fitted correctly.
16 Support the wheel axles on jack stands to avoid load on the tyres.
17 Disconnect the cables from the battery and trickle charge the
battery during the entire storage period.
NOTE
Since Insight draws a little current even when the battery voltage
is switched off using the battery disconnector, the battery cables
should be disconnected.
If very low temperatures are expected during the storage period,

remove the batteries and store them in a warmer location.
Reset after long-term storage
NOTE
If the machine is started without previously being reset after
long-term storage, there is a great risk of extensive damage to
machine and engine.
Always complete all measures for resetting the machine in
accordance with the instructions from Kalmar and the engine
supplier.
1 Check that there are no visible signs of leakage on or around the

machine.
2 Check that the tyre pressure is correct.
3 Remove the jack stands from under the wheel axles.
4 Connect the battery cables to the battery.
5 Remove covers over exhaust outlet and air inlet.
6 Wipe oil/grease from the piston rod surfaces
7 Fill the AdBlue tank, AdBlue, page 231.
8 Close the valves that were opened to drain the pressure in the
hydraulic system, see Maintenance manual.
9 Reset the engine in accordance with the engine manufacturer's
instructions for resetting an engine after long-term storage.
NOTE
Follow the engine manufacturer's instructions carefully. In the
event of any doubt, contact Kalmar.
11 Start the engine and allow it to idle for 3 to 5 minutes.
12 Calibrate the transmission, see Maintenance manual.

8 Environment and standards 267
8 Environment and
standards
General
The ever-increasing industrialisation of our world is having a significant
impact on our global environment. Nature, animals and people are
subjected daily to risks in connection with various forms of chemical
handling.
There are still no fully environmentally safe chemicals, such as oils and
coolants, available on the market. Therefore, all who handle, perform
service on or repair machines must use the tools, assisting devices and
methods necessary to protect the environment in an environmentally
sound manner.
By following the simple rules below, you will contribute to protecting

our environment.
Recycling
Conscientious recycling of the machine is the starting point for the life
cycle to come full circle, and for being able to recycle and make use of
material in new products. According to calculations by Cargotec, the
machine is more than 90% recyclable by weight.
Environmentally hazardous waste

Components such as batteries, oils, and various chemicals and other
items that may constitute environmentally hazardous waste must be
handled and taken care of in an environmentally safe and sound
manner.
Discarded batteries contain substances hazardous to personal health

and the environment. Therefore, handle batteries in an environmentally
safe manner and according to national regulations.
Oils and fluids

Oils freely discharged cause environmental damage and can also be a
fire hazard. Therefore, when emptying and draining oils or fuel, take
appropriate action to prevent unnecessary spills.
Waste oils and fluids should always be taken care of by an authorised

disposal company.
Pay close attention to oil leaks and other fluid leaks! Take immediate
action to seal the leaks.
Air conditioning
The refrigerant in the air conditioning for the cab adds to the
"greenhouse effect" if released into the open air. Special training is
required for all service work on the air conditioning. Many countries
also require certification by a governing authority for such work. When
scrapping an air conditioning unit, the refrigerant shall be taken care
of by a certified company.
Working in a contaminated area

The machine must be equipped for work in contaminated areas
(environmentally polluted or health-hazardous area) before work is
started. Also, there are special local rules in force for such handling
and when servicing such a machine.

268 8 Environment and standards – Environment and standards
Declarations
The machine does not contain asbestos.
The machines contains lead in batteries and in electric cabling.
If the machine is equipped with air conditioning then refrigerant of type

R134a is used.
Standards
CE marking
Machines for the EU/EEA market are CE marked. This means that
upon delivery the machine fulfils the applicable "Essential Health
and Safety Requirements" specified in the EU Machine Directive,
2006/42/EC, as well as other EU directives relevant to this machine
type. For more information, see section 2.2 CE marking.
ANSI/ITSDF marking
Versions of this machine for North America are ANSI/ITSDF marked.
This means that, when delivered, the machine fulfils the basic safety
requirements specified in ANSI/ITSDF B56.1. For more information,
see section 2.3 ANSI/ITSDF marking.
EMC, electromagnetic interference

The EU's EMC directive regarding "Electromagnetic compatibility",
2014/30/EU, gives a general description of the standards that may be
required of a machine from a safety aspect, where the limit values have
been established in international standards. A machine or device that
meets these standards should be CE marked.
Cargotec machines are especially tested with regards to

electromagnetic interference in accordance with harmonised standard
EN12895. The machine's CE-marking and declaration of conformity
also cover the EMC directive. If other electronic equipment is installed
on the machine, it must be CE-marked and tested on the machine
with regards to electromagnetic interference. It must also be approved
by Cargotec.
Exhaust emissions
Machines for the EU/EEA market fulfil the EU Exhaust Directives
97/68/EC and 2004/26/EC, which means that the engine's exhaust
emissions have been limited in accordance with the requirements.
Machines for the North American market fulfil the EPA and CARB
exhaust regulations, which means that engine exhaust emissions have
been limited in accordance with the requirements.
Noise emissions
The sound pressure level in the cab is measured in accordance with
EN 12053 with measurement uncertainty σR=2.5 dB.
Vibration standard
Vibration emitted by the machine is measured according to harmonised
standard EN 13059, where the level of vibration varies depending on
with which type of tyres and driver's seat the machine is equipped. See
section 9 Specifications.

9 Specifications 269
9 Specifications
Data
The machine's weights and dimensions vary depending on how the
machine is equipped. Detailed information regarding this is given in the
product specification and data sheet for the machine in question.
1 Engine Volvo TAD851VE Volvo TAD871VE

Power acc. to ISO 3046 (net power) 185 kW at 1600–2100 rpm 185 kW between 1600 – 2100 rpm
Torque ISO 3046 1160 Nm at 1100–1400 rpm 1160 Nm at 1100 – 1500 rpm
Environment classification EU/EPA Stage 3A/Tier 3 Stage 4/Tier 4f
Max. rotation speed 2100 rpm 2100 rpm
Number of cylinders 6 cylinders 6 cylinders
Alternator, output 28 V / 130 A
System voltage, voltage – capacity 24 V (2x12 V / 145 Ah)
2 Transmission Dana Spicer Off Highway TE17000

No. of gears, forward - reverse 3 - 3
3.3 Power transmission, drive axle Kessler

Drive axle, type Kessler D81
4 Brakes
Footbrake system – wheel affected Wet Disc Brake – drive wheel
Parking brake system – wheel affected Spring brake - drive wheel
5. Steering
Steering system Hydraulic servo
6. Wheels
Dimension, front and rear 14.00x24/24
Tyre pressure, also see pressure plate 1.0 MPa
Tyre type, front and rear Inflated with air. Spare and replacement tyres must be of
brand names approved by Cargotec.
9 Cab
Equivalent sound pressure level in cab LpAZ 72 dB(A)
according to EN12053 with measurement
uncertainty σR=2.5 dB. Measurement value
with standard engine.
Whole-body vibrations according to EN13059 0,5 m/s2
with measurement uncertainty k=0.3 x
measured value.

270 9 Specifications – Specifications
Lamp Output (W) Socket

Direction indicator, front - LEDs are replaced complete
Tail lights, brake lights & direction indicators rear - LEDs are replaced complete
Position lamps - LEDs are replaced complete
Headlights - LEDs are replaced complete
Headlights with high and low beam 75/70 P43t-38 (H4)
Back-up light - LEDs are replaced complete
Work lights - LEDs are replaced complete
Revolving beacon - LEDs are replaced complete
Flashing beacon LED - LEDs are replaced complete
Interior lighting - Replaced complete
Volumes
Any deviation from this table must be approved in writing by Cargotec.
1.2 Engine, fuel system Volvo TAD851VE Volvo TAD871VE

Fuel tank, volume 525 l
Fuel quality EN590
ASTM D 975 No 1-D
ASTM D 975 No 2-D
CAUTION
Use only the fuel of approved quality.
Risk of engine damage, warranty invalidated.
Only fuel of a quality that is approved by the engine
supplier may be used.
AdBlue tank, volume - 35 l

AdBlue quality - AdBlue, according to ISO
standard 22241.
1.7 Engine, cooling system Volvo TAD851VE Volvo TAD871VE

Coolant volume Total: 35 l
Coolant filling point Volvo Penta Coolant VCS, ready-mixed.
See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page 272.
CAUTION
Use approved coolant.
Risk of engine damage and invalidated warranty if
unapproved coolant is used.
Only use coolant approved by the engine supplier when
changing and topping up the coolant.

9 Specifications – Specifications 271
1.8 Engine, lubrication system Volvo TAD851VE Volvo TAD871VE

Oil volume incl. filter Total: 24 l
Oil type, quality See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page 272.
2.6 Transmission, lubrication system Dana Spicer Off Highway TE17000

Oil volume incl. filter Total: 39 l
3.3 Power transmission, drive axle Kessler D81

Oil volume, differential Total: 42 l
Oil volume, hub reduction Total: 2x4 l
4 Brakes
Oil tank brake system, volume 100 l
7 Load handling
Oil volume, planetary gear, hydraulic motor 1.9 l
rotation
Oil volume, disc brake, hydraulic motor rotation 0.6 l
9 Frame, body, cab and accessories

Refrigerant air conditioning R134a
Volume refrigerant 2000 g
Lubricant air conditioning ZXL100PG
Volume, lubricant 0.3 l
Washer fluid 3.5 l
10 Common hydraulics
Oil volume, hydraulic oil tank 425 l
Oil volume, hydraulic system 600 l (total, incl. tank)

Oils and lubricants, recommendation

The service intervals specified by Cargotec in the maintenance manual
only apply if oils are selected in accordance with the table below. The
table indicates recommended viscosity for different oil types, and
grades, depending on the outdoor temperature.
Any deviation from this table must be approved in writing by Cargotec,

and may mean changed service intervals.
°C -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40

Oil type, quality F -40 -22 -4 +14 +32 +50 +68 +86 104
1.8 Engine, lubrication system
Engine option Volvo TAD851VE: SAE 15W40 (engine oil)
VDS-3, VDS-4 SAE 5W30 (engine oil)
1.8 Engine, lubrication system

Engine option Volvo TAD871VE: SAE 15W40 (engine oil)
VDS-4 SAE 10W30 (engine oil)
SAE 5W30 (engine oil)
2.6 Transmission, lubrication system

ATF Dexron III DEXRON® III
3.3 Power transmission, drive axle

API GL-5 SAE 80W140
SAE 75W90
4 Brakes (UTTO oil, 1)

GM Allison C-4 SAE 5W30 (transmission oil)
John Deere J20 C, D
Caterpillar TO-4
7 Load handling
Oil planetary gear hydraulic motor, hypoid oil SAE 80W140
API GL-5
SAE 75W90
Disc brake hydraulic motor, See 10 Common
hydraulics below
10 Common hydraulics
DIN 51524 Part 3 HVLP ISO VG 68
ISO VG 46 HV
ISO VG 32
1 The oil in the brake system has to meet one of the quality requirements.

Stage 3A/Tier 3 engines:
WARNING
Change interval for engine oil requires that the sulphur
content in the fuel does not exceed 0.5%.
Higher sulphur content in the fuel damages the engine
and after-treatment system!
Only use fuel with a sulphur content that does not
exceed 0.5%.
NOTE
Oil filters must be changed in connection with oil change.
ACEA = Association des Constructeurs Européenne d'Automobiles
API = American Petroleum Institute
CES = Cummins Engine Standard
VDS = Volvo Drain Specification
Lubricating grease
Use a universal grease type EP in accordance with NLGI Grade 2 (EP2)
for all lubrication points except for lifting equipment and slide plates.
For central lubrication, only universal grease type EP in accordance

with NLGI Grade 2 (EP2) without molybdenum disulphide may be used.
For lifting equipment use a universal grease type EP according to NLGI

Grade 2 (EP2) with 3-5% molybdenum disulphide mixture.
For slide plates use a lubricant approved by Cargotec. Obtained from

Cargotec Spare Parts Department. 0.65 kg cartridge for grease gun
part. no 923110.0360 and 5 kg tin part. no 923595.0003.
NOTE
Select lubricant class according to the prevailing climate.
Contact grease
Use contact grease part no. 923836.0552. Applies for sealed
connectors.
Sealant silicone
Use silicone part. no. 923107.0308.
Silicone adhesive
Use silicone adhesive part. no. 923854.0100.
Adhesive system for window panes

Only use PU polymer recommended by Cargotec.

Unit explanations
Unit Abbreviation
Newton metre Nm
Kgf/m kpm
Kilo pascal kPa
Mega pascal MPa
Kilowatt kW
Kilojoule kJ
British thermal unit Btu
Calorie ca
Inch in
Feet ft
Yard yd
Mile mile
Centimetre cm
Metre m
Kilometre km

Conversion SI-units
Recalculation Recalculation
SI-unit factor Non-SI factor SI
Torque
Nm x 10.2 = kg·cm x 0.8664 = lb·in
Nm x 0.74 = lbf·ft x 1.36 = Nm
Nm x 0.102 = kg·m x 7.22 = lb·ft
Pressure (Pa = N/m2)
kPa x 4.0 = in.H2O x 0.249 = kPa
kPa x 0.30 = in.Hg x 3.38 = kPa
kPa x 0.145 = psi x 6.89 = kPa
bar x 14.5 = psi x 0.069 = bar
kp/cm 2 x 14.22 = psi x 0.070 = kp/cm2
N/mm 2 x 145.04 = psi x 0.069 = bar
MPa x 145 = psi x 0.00689 = MPa
Power (W = J/s)
kW x 1.36 = hp (cv) x 0.736 = kW
kW x 1.34 = bhp x 0.746 = kW
kW x 0.948 = Btu/s x 1.055 = kW
W x 0.74 = ft·lb/s x 1.36 = W
Energy (J = Nm)
kJ x 0.948 = Btu x 1.055 = kJ
J x 0.239 = calorie x 4.19 = J
Speed and acceleration
m/s2 x 3.28 = ft/s2 x 0.305 = m/s2
m/s x 3.28 = ft/s x 0.305 = m/s
km/h x 0.62 = mph x 1.61 = km/h
Horsepower/torque
Bhp x 5252 rpm= TQ (lb·ft) TQ x rpm 5252 = bhp
Temperature
°C = (°F – 32)/1.8 °F = (°C x 1.8) + 32
Flow factor
l/min (dm3 /min) x 0.264 = US gal/min x 3.785 = litre/min

Conversion table length

Unit cm m km in ft yd mile
cm 1 0.01 0.00001 0.3937 0.03281 0.01094 0.000006
m 100 1 0.001 39.37 3.2808 1.0936 0.00062
km 100000 1000 1 39370.7 3280.8 1093.6 0.62137
in 2.54 0.0254 0.000025 1 0.08333 0.02777 0.000015
ft 30.48 0.3048 0.000304 12 1 0.3333 0.000189
yd 91.44 0.9144 0.000914 36 3 1 0.000568
mile 160930 1609.3 1.6093 63360 5280 1760 1
1 mm = 0.1 cm – 1 mm = 0.001 m
Conversion table area

Unit cm2 m2 km2 a ft2 yd2 in2
cm2 1 0.0001 - 0.000001 0.001076 0.000012 0.155000
m2 10000 1 0.000001 0.01 10.764 1.1958 1550.000
km2 - 1000000 1 10000 1076400 1195800 -
a 0.01 100 0.0001 1 1076.4 119.58 -
ft2 - 0.092903 - 0.000929 1 0.1111 144.000

yd2 - 0.83613 - 0.008361 9 1 1296.00
in2 6.4516 0.000645 - - 0.006943 0.000771 1
1 ha = 100 a – 1 mile2 = 259 ha = 2.59 km2
Conversion table volume

Unit cm3 = cc m3 l in3 ft3 yd3
cm3 = ml 1 0.000001 0.001 0.061024 0.000035 0.000001
m3 1000000 1 1000 61024 35.315 1.30796
dm3 (l) 1000 0.001 1 61.024 0.035315 0.001308
in3 16.387 0.000016 0.01638 1 0.000578 0.000021
ft3 28316.8 0.028317 28.317 1728 1 0.03704
yd3 764529.8 0.76453 764.53 46656 27 1
1 gal (US) = 3785.41 cm3 = 231 in3 = 0.83267 gal (UK)
Conversion table weight

Unit g kg t oz lb
g 1 0.001 0.000001 0.03527 0.0022
kg 1000 1 0.001 35.273 2.20459
t 1000000 1000 1 35273 2204.59
oz 28.3495 0.02835 0.000028 1 0.0625
lb 453.592 0.45359 0.000454 16 1
1 tonne (metric) = 1.1023 ton (US) = 0.9842 ton (UK)

Conversion table pressure

Unit kp/cm 2 bar Pa = N/m2 kPa lbf/in2 lbf/ft2
kp/cm 2 1 0.98067 98066.5 98.0665 14.2233 2048.16
bar 1.01972 1 100000 100 14.5037 2088.6
Pa = N/m2 0.00001 0.001 1 0.001 0.00015 0.02086
kPa 0.01020 0.01 1000 1 0.14504 20.886
lbf/in2 0.07032 0.0689 6894.76 6.89476 1 144
lbf/ft2 0.00047 0.00047 47.88028 0.04788 0.00694 1
kg/cm2 = 735.56 Torr (mmHg) = 0.96784 atm

278 10 Terminology
10 Terminology
Explanations
Term Description
Accumulator Reservoir that stores (accumulates) pressure for, i.e. hydraulic functions.
AdBlue AdBlue contains deionized water mixed with 32.5% urea.
Attachment Part of the machine that grips the load when lifting.
Anti-corrosion agent Prevents oxidation, in simple terms, rustproofing.
Working hydraulics All load handling functions, that is, lift and lower, tilt, side shift, spreading (extension)
and levelling.
Wheelbase Distance between drive axle and steering axle.
Bar Unit to express pressure.
Battery disconnector Cuts off power supply from battery.
Boom Lifting member moveable vertically and longitudinally. Bracket for attachment.
CAN Controller Area Network - Network for communication between the control units.
CAN bus The network between the control units in the machine.
Central lubrication An automatic system for lubrication of a preset number of lubrication points.
Daily inspection Actions that should be performed daily to ensure the machine's functionality.
Decitonne Tenth of a tonne, measure of machine's lift capacity.
Displacement The oil volume that the pump can supply per pump revolution.
Display "Window" showing digital information, i.e. on steering wheel panel in the cab.
Operating time Number of hours machine has been in operation, shown on hour meter in cab.
Drive axle Driving axle that receives the torque from the drivetrain.
Drivetrain Parts in the machine involved in power transmission; engine, torque converter,
transmission, propeller shaft and drive axle with differential and hub reduction.
ECC Electric Climate Control – Air conditioning system with thermostat-controlled cooling,
dehumidification and heating.
Electrolyte level Fluid level in battery cells.
Expansion tank Tank for coolant.
Fixed displacement Non-adjustable volume (capacity) in a pump.
FMI Fault Message Identifier – The part of the error code indicating the type of error.
Main fuse Located by battery. Breaks the current to all systems in the whole machine.
Hydraulic oil Oil for hydraulic system. See specifications in operator's manual.
Hydraulic oil pump Pump in hydraulic system.
Hydraulic system System that uses oil pressure to transfer power to different functions.
Hanging load Lifted load.
Indicator Manual "sensor", for example, shows that a filter is clogged and needs to be changed.
KAU Kalmar Attachment Unit - Control unit KAU (D7911) is fitted on the attachment and
operates components on the attachment.
KCU Kalmar Cab Unit - Control Unit KCU (D7901) is fitted in the cab and is the control unit
that controls the start-up and shutdown of the machine's electrical system.
KFU Kalmar Frame Unit - Control unit KFU (D7971) is fitted on the inside of the left-hand
frame member above the drive axle. The control unit operates components in the frame
and on the boom.

10 Terminology – Terminology 279
Term Description
KID Kalmar Information Display - Control unit KID (D7950), the display in the cab.
KPU Kalmar Panel Unit - Control unit KPU (D7902) is fitted in the right-hand switch panel in
the cab and operates switches and controls in the cab.
KST Kalmar Service Tool - Computer program for service, calibration, setting and
programming of the machine's control units.
Piston rod Rod that is pushed into the piston's cylinder barrel and is acted upon by the hydraulic
pressure.
Refrigerant Fluid/gas in air conditioning. Must only be handled by authorised trained personnel.
LC Load Centre - Horizontal distance from the front edge of the drive wheel to the centre
of the attachment.
LLMC LLMC (Longitudinal Load Moment Control), see overload system.
Lift capacity Indicates machine's maximum lift capacity.
Lifting point Attaching point for lift device when lifting an object.
Low-emission engine Engine with low emissions of hazardous substances. Manufactured in accordance
with regulations.
Solenoid valve An electro-magnetically controlled valve. See also proportional valve.
Control valve Valves that can be used to control something, for example, to release pressure and thus
lower a boom or a fork.
Machine model
Environmental waste Used oils, filters, etc., must be handled according to governing national laws and
regulations.
Torque converter Hydraulic, variable clutch.
Counterweight Weights adapted to the machine's lift capacity to constitute an opposing load when lifting.
Hub reduction Type of final drive (often next to drive wheel) that reduces rpm and increases torque
from the drivetrain.
Node An end point or switching point in a data network. A node on the machine is the same
thing as a control unit on one of the machine's CAN buses.
Node number Each control unit (node) has a Kalmar-unique number used for identification and fault
reporting on the CAN bus.
OHC Over Height Container – Container with parts or load protruding over the holes for
twistlocks. To lift this type of container there are special attachments with lowerable
extensions for twistlocks.
Pilot oil pressure A low control pressure to, for example, a valve.
Planetary gear Type of transmission with gears in constant engagement.
Product alternative One of several alternatives is selected for a machine, e.g. engine option.
Progressive steering Quick steering wheel movements give greater steering angles.
Proportional valve An electro-magnetically controlled valve. If a voltage is applied, the valve is activated
in proportion to the voltage amplitude. In simple terms, infinitely variable valve, as
opposed to on/off valve. For example, found on transmission's valve housing.
Reachstacker Machine with special lift boom and top lift attachment for containers.
Recirculation Circulation in a closed system.
Control unit Electronic box that controls the machine's functions. The control units communicate
with each other using the CAN buses.
SCR Selective Catalytic Reduction – Exhaust technology which means that AdBlue is added
to the exhaust gases in order to reduce the amount of nitrogen oxides (NOx). The urea
in AdBlue breaks down into ammonia, which in the SCR catalytic converter, reacts
with nitrogen oxide (NOx) as harmless nitrogen and water vapour is formed. Available
for Volvo stage 3B/4i engines.
Serial number Unique machine designation. On the machine plate.

280 10 Terminology – Terminology
Term Description
Service position How machine should be safely positioned before service may be started.
Servo A small movement by the user results in a large angle, i.e. servo steering.
Servo pressure A low control pressure to control a higher pressure, for example, to a valve.
Side shift Parallel sideways movement of attachment.
Levelling Attachment is tilted, for example if load stands on uneven ground.
SPN Suspect Parameter Number – Is a unique number for machine components. Used in
circuit diagrams and error codes.
Spreading (positioning) Widening of attachment.
Dust reservoir The air filter collects the coarsest particles in a dust reservoir, which is emptied
automatically during operation.
Steering axle Wheel axle with steering.
Buzzer Acoustic alarm to catch the operator's attention.
Option Extra equipment for machine.
Tilting Load is leaned forward or backward.
Top lift Attachment. See attachment.
Transmission oil Oil for transmission and torque converter. See specifications in operator's manual.
Securing machine for transport Actions before transporting machine.
Twistlocks Four locking pins, one in each corner of the attachment, pushed down in corresponding
holes in container and twisted to lock the container when lifting.
Type designation Indicates machine type and capacity. See also machine model.
Maintenance Periodic maintenance actions so that machine functions safely and for a long service life.
UTTO oil Universal Tractor Transmission Oil.
Variable pump Pump with adjustable flow rate.
Variable displacement Adjustable volume (capacity) of a pump.
Valve slide Moveable part in valve. Determines oil's path.
Rotation bar Rotating unit on attachment, rotates attachment in relation to lift boom.
Wet brakes Brake discs in oil bath.
Overload system A warning system, LLMC (Longitudinal Load Moment Control). The system is used for
stationary load handling, to not jeopardise the machine's forward stability. LLMC is not
designed to control lateral stability or stability when operating.

11 Index – Index 281
Index Event menu overload steering axle . . . . .

Event menu parking brake . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
79
82
Event menu preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Event menu raise/lower cab temperature . . . . . . . 87
A Event menu raise/lower fan speed . . . . . . . . . . 87
Event menu release the parking brake . . . . . . . . . 86
About the documentation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Event menu rotation stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
About the operator's manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Event menu seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Air filter, engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Event menu service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
ANSI/ITSDF marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Event menu speed limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Event menu speed limitation, load position . . . . . . . 91
Event menu speed limitation, warm-up mode . . . . . . 91
B Event menu start interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Back-up camera and distance warning . . . . . . . . 92 Event menu tilt lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Battery and battery disconnector . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Event menu twistlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Event menu tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Event menu, boom in incorrect position . . . . . . . . 91
Event menu, cab in incorrect position . . . . . . . . . 91
C Event menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
CE-marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Central lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Checking accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 F
Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Control for load handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Fire extinguishing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Customer settings via display . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Functions for load handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fuses for electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
D
Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99, 222
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
G
Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
E H
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Engine operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Heating / Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 191
Environment and standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Error code indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Error code information on display . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Error code tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 I
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Event menu AdBlue end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Identification of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Event menu air filter air conditioning system . . . . . . 85 Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the
Event menu arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Event menu automatic spreading 20'–40' . . . . . . . 84 Insight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Event menu automatic start function. . . . . . . . . . 90 Inspection and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 221
Event menu automatic stop function . . . . . . . . . . 90 Instruments and controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Event menu battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Event menu brake temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Event menu contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 K
Event menu control breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Keep in mind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Event menu engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . . 80
Event menu heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen . . 87
Event menu height limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Event menu incorrect tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . 78 L
Event menu intermittent wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Lifting and transporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . 260
Event menu load centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Lifting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Event menu low accumulator pressure . . . . . . 78, 82 Lifting machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Event menu low AdBlue level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Light panel on boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Event menu low coolant level engine . . . . . . . . . 89 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Event menu low fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Load handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 196
Event menu low washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . 85 Long-term storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Event menu no operator in seat. . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Event menu oil temperature hydraulics . . . . . . . . 81
Event menu oil temperature transmission . . . . . . . 81
Event menu open door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
M
Event menu operator identification . . . . . . . . . . 90 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Event menu overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Mechanical release of parking brake . . . . . . . . . 259
Event menu overload drive axle . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Menu for active error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

282 11 Index – Index
Menu for inactive error codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Menu for machine check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Menu for machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Menu for services and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Menu for statistics and history . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Starting engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Multi-function lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Stopping the engine - parking . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
O Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Oil, brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 T
Operating menu electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Operating menu load centre monitoring . . . . . . . . 75 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Operating menu load counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 The event menu parking brake not activated and no
Operating menu scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 operator in the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Operating menu system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Operating menu trip computer work shift . . . . . . . . 73 Transmission and hydraulics operating menu . . . . . . 74
Operating menu tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . 76 Transmission oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Operating menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Transporting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Optional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Transporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . 257, 261
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Travel direction selector and parking brake . . . . . . . 54
Overview description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Tyres and rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
P U
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
V
R Vehicle Data Interface (VDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Reading instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 W
Warming up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
S Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
While operating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Safety and emergency equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Declaration of Conformity
We, Cargotec Sweden AB, SE-341 32 Ljungby, Sweden, (Registration No. 556014-5418)
herewith declare that the machine,
Type Reachstacker
Commercial name KALMAR
Model DRG120-54S6
Serial No B11500079
is manufactured in conformity with the requirements in

- The Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
- The Electro Magnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU

- the harmonised standard EN 1459 Safety of industrial trucks
Self propelled variable reach trucks.
Authorized to compile the technical file

Torbjörn Lövdahl
InfoString: 2A / KCH / C / 16168 / R / GB / 20181203 / 104840
Cargotec Sweden AB, SE-341 32 Ljungby, Sweden
Name Dan Pettersson

Position SVP Kalmar Mobile Equipment
Ljungby 2018-10-25
Place, Date of Issue Signature
283 11 Index – Index

last page
Kalmar offers the widest range of cargo handling solutions and services Cargotec Sweden AB
to ports, terminals, distribution centres and heavy industry. Kalmar is Movägen 1
the industry forerunner in terminal automation and in energy-efficient SE-341 32, Ljungby, Sweden
container handling, with one in four container moves around the globe
tel. +46 372 260 00
being handled by a Kalmar solution.
Through our extensive product portfolio, global service network and ability www.kalmarglobal.com
to enable a seamless integration of different terminal processes, Kalmar
improves the efficiency of every move.

DRG100-120 - Operator Manual - IDRG02 - 03GB PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRG100-120 - Operator Manual - IDRG02 - 03GB PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reachstackers 10-12 tonnes

Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

This Operator's manual contains information that you must keep in

Operator's manual, purpose

Cargotec will not accept any responsibility for machine modifications

About machine version

Cargotec reserves the right to make changes to specifications and

Duplication of the content in this manual, in whole or in part, is strictly

All duplication by any means, such as copying, printing, etc., is

Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

1.1.1 Reading instructions

Read the operator's manual

Read the operator's manual

Read the Maintenance manual

refers to important information in the Maintenance manual.

Read the Maintenance manual

IDRG02.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 100-120

See the machine card for complete specifications of the machine's

Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

1.2 About the documentation kit

There is supplementary documentation that can be ordered for the

Always indicate publication number when ordering. The publication

IDRG02.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 100-120

1.3 Inspection and maintenance

Maintenance described in this operator's manual can be performed by

Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

The safety information in this operator's manual is intended for your

Important to read the operator's manual

In addition, you will obtain a lot of valuable information that makes

The operator's manual should always remain in the machine. If it is lost

Ask your foreman or supervisor if there is anything in the text you do

IDRG02.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 100-120

Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

2.1 Safety and emergency equipment

The machine may be equipped with the following safety equipment:

1. Revolving beacon. Seat belt, passenger seat .

IDRG02.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 100-120

As proof that the requirements are fulfilled, the machine is provided

For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

2.3 ANSI/ITSDF marking

This machine is ANSI/ITSDF marked. This means that upon delivery it

For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

IDRG02.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 100-120

2.4 Keep in mind

For machines with SCR-system (emission control with AdBlue):

During work shifts

Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

IDRG02.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 100-120

Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

IDRG02.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 100-120

Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

IDRG02.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 100-120

Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

IDRG02.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 100-120

Fire prevention measures

Make it a habit to make a visual inspection of the engine and engine

Action after fire

Operator’s manual DRG 100-120 IDRG02.03GB

3.1.1 Identification of the machine

A machine card is supplied together with the spare parts catalogue.

The machine card must be updated when the machine is modified

IDRG02.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 100-120